Updated Brazillian portuguese and Russian translation
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c man end
251 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
252 @c Add an empty line for separation.
253 @c man begin TARGET
254 @ifset AARCH64
255
256 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259 @end ifset
260 @ifset ALPHA
261
262 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268 @end ifset
269 @ifset ARC
270
271 @emph{Target ARC options:}
272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274 [@b{-mcode-density}]
275 [@b{-mrelax}]
276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277 @end ifset
278 @ifset ARM
279
280 @emph{Target ARM options:}
281 @c Don't document the deprecated options
282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287 [@b{-mthumb}]
288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292 @end ifset
293 @ifset Blackfin
294
295 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297 [@b{-mfdpic}]
298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299 [@b{-mnopic}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset CRIS
302
303 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D10V
312
313 @emph{Target D10V options:}
314 [@b{-O}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset D30V
317
318 @emph{Target D30V options:}
319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset EPIPHANY
322
323 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset H8
327
328 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329 [-h-tick-hex]
330 @end ifset
331 @ifset HPPA
332 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I80386
335
336 @emph{Target i386 options:}
337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339 @end ifset
340 @ifset I960
341
342 @emph{Target i960 options:}
343 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IA64
349
350 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset IP2K
360
361 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32C
365
366 @emph{Target M32C options:}
367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M32R
370
371 @emph{Target M32R options:}
372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373 @b{--W[n]p}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M680X0
376
377 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset M68HC11
381
382 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MCORE
391
392 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset METAG
397
398 @emph{Target Meta options:}
399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400 @end ifset
401 @ifset MICROBLAZE
402 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404 @end ifset
405 @ifset MIPS
406
407 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
420 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
421 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
422 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
423 [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
424 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
425 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
426 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
427 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
428 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
429 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
430 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
431 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
432 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
433 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
434 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
435 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
436 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
437 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
438 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
439 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
440 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
441 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
442 @end ifset
443 @ifset MMIX
444
445 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
446 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
447 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
448 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
449 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
450 @end ifset
451 @ifset NIOSII
452
453 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
454 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
455 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
456 @end ifset
457 @ifset NDS32
458
459 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
460 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
461 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
462 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
463 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
464 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
465 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
466 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
467 [@b{-mb2bb}]
468 @end ifset
469 @ifset PDP11
470
471 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
472 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
473 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
474 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
475 @end ifset
476 @ifset PJ
477
478 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
479 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
480 @end ifset
481 @ifset PPC
482
483 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
484 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
485 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
486 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
487 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
488 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
489 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
490 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mspe2}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
491 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
492 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
493 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
494 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
495 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
496 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
497 @end ifset
498 @ifset PRU
499
500 @emph{Target PRU options:}
501 [@b{-link-relax}]
502 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
503 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
504 @end ifset
505 @ifset RISCV
506
507 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
508 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
509 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
510 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
511 @end ifset
512 @ifset RL78
513
514 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
515 [@b{-mg10}]
516 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
517 @end ifset
518 @ifset RX
519
520 @emph{Target RX options:}
521 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
522 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
523 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
524 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
525 [@b{-mpid}]
526 [@b{-mrelax}]
527 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
528 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
529 @end ifset
530 @ifset S390
531
532 @emph{Target s390 options:}
533 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
534 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
535 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
536 @end ifset
537 @ifset SCORE
538
539 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
540 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
541 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
542 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
543 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
544 @end ifset
545 @ifset SPARC
546
547 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
548 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
549 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
550 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
551 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
552 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
553 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
554 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
555 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
556 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
557 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
558 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
559 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
560 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
561 @b{-bump}]
562 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
563 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
564 @end ifset
565 @ifset TIC54X
566
567 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
568 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
569 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
570 @end ifset
571 @ifset TIC6X
572
573 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
574 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
575 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
576 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
577 @end ifset
578 @ifset TILEGX
579
580 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
581 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
582 @end ifset
583 @ifset TILEPRO
584 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
585 @end ifset
586 @ifset VISIUM
587
588 @emph{Target Visium options:}
589 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
590 @end ifset
591 @ifset XTENSA
592
593 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
594 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
595 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
596 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
597 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
598 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
599 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
600 @end ifset
601 @ifset Z80
602
603 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
604 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
605 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
606 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
607 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
608 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
609 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
610 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
611 @end ifset
612 @ifset Z8000
613
614 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
615 @end ifset
616
617 @c man end
618 @end smallexample
619
620 @c man begin OPTIONS
621
622 @table @gcctabopt
623 @include at-file.texi
624
625 @item -a[cdghlmns]
626 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
627
628 @table @gcctabopt
629 @item -ac
630 omit false conditionals
631
632 @item -ad
633 omit debugging directives
634
635 @item -ag
636 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
637
638 @item -ah
639 include high-level source
640
641 @item -al
642 include assembly
643
644 @item -am
645 include macro expansions
646
647 @item -an
648 omit forms processing
649
650 @item -as
651 include symbols
652
653 @item =file
654 set the name of the listing file
655 @end table
656
657 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
658 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
659 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
660
661 @item --alternate
662 Begin in alternate macro mode.
663 @ifclear man
664 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
665 @end ifclear
666
667 @item --compress-debug-sections
668 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
669 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
670 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
671 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
672
673 @ifset ELF
674 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
675 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
676 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
677 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
678 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
679 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
680 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
681 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
682 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
683 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
684 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
685 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
686 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
687 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
688 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
689
690 @end ifset
691
692 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
693 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
694 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
695 override this.
696
697 @item -D
698 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
699 other assemblers.
700
701 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
702 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
703 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
704
705 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
706 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
707 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
708 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
709 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
710 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
711
712 @item -f
713 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
714 compiler output).
715
716 @item -g
717 @itemx --gen-debug
718 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
719 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
720 ECOFF or DWARF2.
721
722 @item --gstabs
723 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
724 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
725
726 @item --gstabs+
727 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
728 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
729 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
730 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
731 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
732
733 @item --gdwarf-2
734 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
735 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
736 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
737
738 @item --gdwarf-sections
739 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
740 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
741 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
742 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
743 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
744 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
745 suffix.
746
747 @ifset ELF
748 @item --size-check=error
749 @itemx --size-check=warning
750 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
751
752 @item --elf-stt-common=no
753 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
754 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
755 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
756 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
757 @end ifset
758
759 @item --help
760 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
761
762 @item --target-help
763 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
764
765 @item -I @var{dir}
766 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
767
768 @item -J
769 Don't warn about signed overflow.
770
771 @item -K
772 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
773 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
774 @end ifclear
775 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
776 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
777 @end ifset
778
779 @item -L
780 @itemx --keep-locals
781 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
782 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
783 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
784 @ifclear man
785 @xref{Symbol Names}.
786 @end ifclear
787
788 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
789 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
790 listing to @var{number}.
791
792 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
793 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
794 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
795
796 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
797 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
798 @var{number} bytes.
799
800 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
801 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
802 to @var{number} + 1.
803
804 @item --no-pad-sections
805 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
806 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
807 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
808
809 @item -o @var{objfile}
810 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
811
812 @item -R
813 Fold the data section into the text section.
814
815 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
816 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
817 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
818 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
819 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
820 requirements at the expense of speed.
821
822 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
823 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
824 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
825 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
826
827 @ifset ELF
828 @item --sectname-subst
829 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
830 @ifclear man
831 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
832 @end ifclear
833 @end ifset
834
835 @item --statistics
836 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
837 assembly.
838
839 @item --strip-local-absolute
840 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
841
842 @item -v
843 @itemx -version
844 Print the @command{as} version.
845
846 @item --version
847 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
848
849 @item -W
850 @itemx --no-warn
851 Suppress warning messages.
852
853 @item --fatal-warnings
854 Treat warnings as errors.
855
856 @item --warn
857 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
858
859 @item -w
860 Ignored.
861
862 @item -x
863 Ignored.
864
865 @item -Z
866 Generate an object file even after errors.
867
868 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
869 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
870
871 @end table
872 @c man end
873
874 @ifset AARCH64
875
876 @ifclear man
877 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
878 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
879 @end ifclear
880
881 @ifset man
882 @c man begin OPTIONS
883 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
884 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
885 @c man end
886 @c man begin INCLUDE
887 @include c-aarch64.texi
888 @c ended inside the included file
889 @end ifset
890
891 @end ifset
892
893 @ifset ALPHA
894
895 @ifclear man
896 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
897 for an Alpha processor.
898 @end ifclear
899
900 @ifset man
901 @c man begin OPTIONS
902 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
903 processor.
904 @c man end
905 @c man begin INCLUDE
906 @include c-alpha.texi
907 @c ended inside the included file
908 @end ifset
909
910 @end ifset
911
912 @c man begin OPTIONS
913 @ifset ARC
914 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
915 processor.
916
917 @table @gcctabopt
918 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
919 This option selects the core processor variant.
920 @item -EB | -EL
921 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
922 @item -mcode-density
923 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
924 @end table
925 @end ifset
926
927 @ifset ARM
928 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
929 processor family.
930
931 @table @gcctabopt
932 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
933 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
934 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
935 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
936 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
937 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
938 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
939 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
940 @item -mthumb
941 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
942 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
943 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
944 @item -EB | -EL
945 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
946 @item -mthumb-interwork
947 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
948 ARM code in mind.
949 @item -mccs
950 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
951 @item -k
952 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
953 @end table
954 @end ifset
955 @c man end
956
957 @ifset Blackfin
958
959 @ifclear man
960 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
961 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
962 @end ifclear
963
964 @ifset man
965 @c man begin OPTIONS
966 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
967 the Blackfin processor family.
968 @c man end
969 @c man begin INCLUDE
970 @include c-bfin.texi
971 @c ended inside the included file
972 @end ifset
973
974 @end ifset
975
976 @c man begin OPTIONS
977 @ifset CRIS
978 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
979 @end ifset
980
981 @ifset D10V
982 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
983 a D10V processor.
984 @table @gcctabopt
985 @cindex D10V optimization
986 @cindex optimization, D10V
987 @item -O
988 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
989 @end table
990 @end ifset
991
992 @ifset D30V
993 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
994 processor.
995 @table @gcctabopt
996 @cindex D30V optimization
997 @cindex optimization, D30V
998 @item -O
999 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1000
1001 @cindex D30V nops
1002 @item -n
1003 Warn when nops are generated.
1004
1005 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1006 @item -N
1007 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1008 @end table
1009 @end ifset
1010 @c man end
1011
1012 @ifset EPIPHANY
1013 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1014 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1015
1016 @ifclear man
1017 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1018 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1019 @end ifclear
1020
1021 @ifset man
1022 @c man begin OPTIONS
1023 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1024 an Epiphany processor.
1025 @c man end
1026 @c man begin INCLUDE
1027 @include c-epiphany.texi
1028 @c ended inside the included file
1029 @end ifset
1030
1031 @end ifset
1032
1033 @ifset H8300
1034
1035 @ifclear man
1036 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1037 for an H8/300 processor.
1038 @end ifclear
1039
1040 @ifset man
1041 @c man begin OPTIONS
1042 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1043 processor.
1044 @c man end
1045 @c man begin INCLUDE
1046 @include c-h8300.texi
1047 @c ended inside the included file
1048 @end ifset
1049
1050 @end ifset
1051
1052 @ifset I80386
1053
1054 @ifclear man
1055 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1056 configured for an i386 processor.
1057 @end ifclear
1058
1059 @ifset man
1060 @c man begin OPTIONS
1061 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1062 an i386 processor.
1063 @c man end
1064 @c man begin INCLUDE
1065 @include c-i386.texi
1066 @c ended inside the included file
1067 @end ifset
1068
1069 @end ifset
1070
1071 @c man begin OPTIONS
1072 @ifset I960
1073 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1074 Intel 80960 processor.
1075
1076 @table @gcctabopt
1077 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1078 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1079
1080 @item -b
1081 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1082
1083 @item -no-relax
1084 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1085 error if necessary.
1086
1087 @end table
1088 @end ifset
1089
1090 @ifset IP2K
1091 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1092 Ubicom IP2K series.
1093
1094 @table @gcctabopt
1095
1096 @item -mip2022ext
1097 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1098
1099 @item -mip2022
1100 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1101 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1102
1103 @end table
1104 @end ifset
1105
1106 @ifset M32C
1107 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1108 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1109
1110 @table @gcctabopt
1111
1112 @item -m32c
1113 Assemble M32C instructions.
1114
1115 @item -m16c
1116 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1117
1118 @item -relax
1119 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1120
1121 @item -h-tick-hex
1122 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1123
1124 @end table
1125 @end ifset
1126
1127 @ifset M32R
1128 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1129 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1130
1131 @table @gcctabopt
1132
1133 @item --m32rx
1134 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1135 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1136
1137 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1138 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1139 encountered.
1140
1141 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1142 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1143 encountered.
1144
1145 @end table
1146 @end ifset
1147
1148 @ifset M680X0
1149 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1150 Motorola 68000 series.
1151
1152 @table @gcctabopt
1153
1154 @item -l
1155 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1156
1157 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1158 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1159 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1160 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1161 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1162
1163 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1164 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1165 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1166 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1167 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1168 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1169
1170 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1171 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1172 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1173
1174 @end table
1175 @end ifset
1176
1177 @ifset NIOSII
1178
1179 @ifclear man
1180 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1181 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1182 @end ifclear
1183
1184 @ifset man
1185 @c man begin OPTIONS
1186 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1187 Altera Nios II processor.
1188 @c man end
1189 @c man begin INCLUDE
1190 @include c-nios2.texi
1191 @c ended inside the included file
1192 @end ifset
1193 @end ifset
1194
1195 @ifset PDP11
1196
1197 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1198 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1199
1200 @table @gcctabopt
1201 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1202 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1203 default is @option{-mpic}.
1204
1205 @item -mall
1206 @itemx -mall-extensions
1207 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1208
1209 @item -mno-extensions
1210 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1211
1212 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1213 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1214
1215 @item -m@var{cpu}
1216 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1217 disable all other extensions.
1218
1219 @item -m@var{machine}
1220 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1221 model, and disable all other extensions.
1222 @end table
1223
1224 @end ifset
1225
1226 @ifset PJ
1227 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1228 a picoJava processor.
1229
1230 @table @gcctabopt
1231
1232 @cindex PJ endianness
1233 @cindex endianness, PJ
1234 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1235 @item -mb
1236 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1237
1238 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1239 @item -ml
1240 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1241
1242 @end table
1243 @end ifset
1244
1245 @ifset PRU
1246
1247 @ifclear man
1248 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1249 for a PRU processor.
1250 @end ifclear
1251
1252 @ifset man
1253 @c man begin OPTIONS
1254 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1255 PRU processor.
1256 @c man end
1257 @c man begin INCLUDE
1258 @include c-pru.texi
1259 @c ended inside the included file
1260 @end ifset
1261 @end ifset
1262
1263 @ifset M68HC11
1264 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1265 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1266
1267 @table @gcctabopt
1268
1269 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1270 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1271 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1272
1273 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1274 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1275 XGATE address space.
1276
1277 @item -mshort
1278 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1279
1280 @item -mlong
1281 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1282
1283 @item -mshort-double
1284 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1285
1286 @item -mlong-double
1287 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1288
1289 @item --force-long-branches
1290 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1291 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1292 sub routine.
1293
1294 @item -S | --short-branches
1295 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1296 when the offset is out of range.
1297
1298 @item --strict-direct-mode
1299 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1300 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1301
1302 @item --print-insn-syntax
1303 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1304
1305 @item --print-opcodes
1306 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1307
1308 @item --generate-example
1309 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1310 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1311
1312 @end table
1313 @end ifset
1314
1315 @ifset SPARC
1316 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1317 for the SPARC architecture:
1318
1319 @table @gcctabopt
1320 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1321 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1322 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1323
1324 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1325 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1326
1327 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1328 UltraSPARC extensions.
1329
1330 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1331 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1332 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1333
1334 @item -bump
1335 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1336 @end table
1337 @end ifset
1338
1339 @ifset TIC54X
1340 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1341 architecture.
1342
1343 @table @gcctabopt
1344 @item -mfar-mode
1345 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1346 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1347 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1348 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1349 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1350 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1351 behaviour in the shell.
1352 @end table
1353 @end ifset
1354
1355 @ifset MIPS
1356 @c man begin OPTIONS
1357 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1358 a MIPS processor.
1359
1360 @table @gcctabopt
1361 @item -G @var{num}
1362 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1363 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1364 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1365
1366 @cindex MIPS endianness
1367 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1368 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1369 @item -EB
1370 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1371
1372 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1373 @item -EL
1374 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1375
1376 @cindex MIPS ISA
1377 @item -mips1
1378 @itemx -mips2
1379 @itemx -mips3
1380 @itemx -mips4
1381 @itemx -mips5
1382 @itemx -mips32
1383 @itemx -mips32r2
1384 @itemx -mips32r3
1385 @itemx -mips32r5
1386 @itemx -mips32r6
1387 @itemx -mips64
1388 @itemx -mips64r2
1389 @itemx -mips64r3
1390 @itemx -mips64r5
1391 @itemx -mips64r6
1392 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1393 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1394 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1395 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1396 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1397 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1398 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1399 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1400 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1401 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1402
1403 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1404 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1405
1406 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1407 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1408
1409 @item -mfix7000
1410 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1411 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1412 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1413
1414 @item -mfix-rm7000
1415 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1416 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1417 followed by a load instruction.
1418
1419 @item -mdebug
1420 @itemx -no-mdebug
1421 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1422 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1423
1424 @item -mpdr
1425 @itemx -mno-pdr
1426 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1427
1428 @item -mgp32
1429 @itemx -mfp32
1430 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1431 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1432 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1433 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1434
1435 @item -mgp64
1436 @itemx -mfp64
1437 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1438 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1439 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1440 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1441
1442 @item -mfpxx
1443 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1444 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1445 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1446 32 or 64 bits wide.
1447
1448 @item -modd-spreg
1449 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1450 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1451 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1452 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1453
1454 @item -mips16
1455 @itemx -no-mips16
1456 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1457 @code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1458 turns off this option.
1459
1460 @item -mmips16e2
1461 @itemx -mno-mips16e2
1462 Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
1463 to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
1464 @samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
1465
1466 @item -mmicromips
1467 @itemx -mno-micromips
1468 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1469 @code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1470 @samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
1471 @code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1472
1473 @item -msmartmips
1474 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1475 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1476 equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
1477 file. @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1478
1479 @item -mips3d
1480 @itemx -no-mips3d
1481 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1482 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1483 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1484
1485 @item -mdmx
1486 @itemx -no-mdmx
1487 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1488 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1489 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1490
1491 @item -mdsp
1492 @itemx -mno-dsp
1493 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1494 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1495 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1496
1497 @item -mdspr2
1498 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1499 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1500 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1501 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1502 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1503
1504 @item -mdspr3
1505 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1506 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1507 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1508 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1509 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1510
1511 @item -mmsa
1512 @itemx -mno-msa
1513 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1514 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1515 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1516
1517 @item -mxpa
1518 @itemx -mno-xpa
1519 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1520 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1521 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1522
1523 @item -mmt
1524 @itemx -mno-mt
1525 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1526 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1527 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1528
1529 @item -mmcu
1530 @itemx -mno-mcu
1531 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1532 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1533 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1534
1535 @item -minsn32
1536 @itemx -mno-insn32
1537 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1538 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1539 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1540 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1541 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1542 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1543 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1544
1545 @item --construct-floats
1546 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1547 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1548 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1549 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1550 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1551 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1552
1553 @item --relax-branch
1554 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1555 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1556 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1557 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1558
1559 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1560 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1561 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1562 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1563 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1564 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1565 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1566 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1567 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1568 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1569
1570 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1571 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1572 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1573
1574 @cindex emulation
1575 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1576 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1577 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1578 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1579 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1580
1581 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1582 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1583 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1584 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1585 preferred options instead.
1586
1587 @item -nocpp
1588 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1589 the native tools.
1590
1591 @item --trap
1592 @itemx --no-trap
1593 @itemx --break
1594 @itemx --no-break
1595 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1596 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1597 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1598 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1599 break exception.
1600
1601 @item -n
1602 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1603 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1604 @end table
1605 @c man end
1606 @end ifset
1607
1608 @ifset MCORE
1609 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1610 an MCore processor.
1611
1612 @table @gcctabopt
1613 @item -jsri2bsr
1614 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1615 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1616 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1617
1618 @item -sifilter
1619 @itemx -nosifilter
1620 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1621 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1622
1623 @item -relax
1624 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1625
1626 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1627 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1628 can be assembled.
1629
1630 @item -EB
1631 Assemble for a big endian target.
1632
1633 @item -EL
1634 Assemble for a little endian target.
1635
1636 @end table
1637 @end ifset
1638 @c man end
1639
1640 @ifset METAG
1641
1642 @ifclear man
1643 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1644 for a Meta processor.
1645 @end ifclear
1646
1647 @ifset man
1648 @c man begin OPTIONS
1649 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1650 Meta processor.
1651 @c man end
1652 @c man begin INCLUDE
1653 @include c-metag.texi
1654 @c ended inside the included file
1655 @end ifset
1656
1657 @end ifset
1658
1659 @c man begin OPTIONS
1660 @ifset MMIX
1661 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1662 @end ifset
1663
1664 @ifset NDS32
1665
1666 @ifclear man
1667 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1668 for a NDS32 processor.
1669 @end ifclear
1670 @c ended inside the included file
1671 @end ifset
1672
1673 @ifset man
1674 @c man begin OPTIONS
1675 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1676 NDS32 processor.
1677 @c man end
1678 @c man begin INCLUDE
1679 @include c-nds32.texi
1680 @c ended inside the included file
1681 @end ifset
1682
1683 @c man end
1684 @ifset PPC
1685
1686 @ifclear man
1687 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1688 for a PowerPC processor.
1689 @end ifclear
1690
1691 @ifset man
1692 @c man begin OPTIONS
1693 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1694 PowerPC processor.
1695 @c man end
1696 @c man begin INCLUDE
1697 @include c-ppc.texi
1698 @c ended inside the included file
1699 @end ifset
1700
1701 @end ifset
1702
1703 @ifset RISCV
1704
1705 @ifclear man
1706 @xref{RISC-V-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1707 for a RISC-V processor.
1708 @end ifclear
1709
1710 @ifset man
1711 @c man begin OPTIONS
1712 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1713 RISC-V processor.
1714 @c man end
1715 @c man begin INCLUDE
1716 @include c-riscv.texi
1717 @c ended inside the included file
1718 @end ifset
1719
1720 @end ifset
1721
1722 @c man begin OPTIONS
1723 @ifset RX
1724 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1725 @end ifset
1726
1727 @ifset S390
1728 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1729 processor family.
1730
1731 @table @gcctabopt
1732 @item -m31
1733 @itemx -m64
1734 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1735 @item -mesa
1736 @item -mzarch
1737 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1738 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1739 @item -march=@var{processor}
1740 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1741 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1742 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1743 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1744 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), or @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}).
1745 @item -mregnames
1746 @itemx -mno-regnames
1747 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1748 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1749 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1750 but evaluates to zero.
1751 @end table
1752 @end ifset
1753 @c man end
1754
1755 @ifset TIC6X
1756
1757 @ifclear man
1758 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1759 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1760 @end ifclear
1761
1762 @ifset man
1763 @c man begin OPTIONS
1764 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1765 TMS320C6000 processor.
1766 @c man end
1767 @c man begin INCLUDE
1768 @include c-tic6x.texi
1769 @c ended inside the included file
1770 @end ifset
1771
1772 @end ifset
1773
1774 @ifset TILEGX
1775
1776 @ifclear man
1777 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1778 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1779 @end ifclear
1780
1781 @ifset man
1782 @c man begin OPTIONS
1783 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1784 processor.
1785 @c man end
1786 @c man begin INCLUDE
1787 @include c-tilegx.texi
1788 @c ended inside the included file
1789 @end ifset
1790
1791 @end ifset
1792
1793 @ifset VISIUM
1794
1795 @ifclear man
1796 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1797 for a Visium processor.
1798 @end ifclear
1799
1800 @ifset man
1801 @c man begin OPTIONS
1802 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1803 processor.
1804 @c man end
1805 @c man begin INCLUDE
1806 @include c-visium.texi
1807 @c ended inside the included file
1808 @end ifset
1809
1810 @end ifset
1811
1812 @ifset XTENSA
1813
1814 @ifclear man
1815 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1816 for an Xtensa processor.
1817 @end ifclear
1818
1819 @ifset man
1820 @c man begin OPTIONS
1821 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1822 Xtensa processor.
1823 @c man end
1824 @c man begin INCLUDE
1825 @include c-xtensa.texi
1826 @c ended inside the included file
1827 @end ifset
1828
1829 @end ifset
1830
1831 @c man begin OPTIONS
1832
1833 @ifset Z80
1834 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1835 a Z80 family processor.
1836 @table @gcctabopt
1837 @item -z80
1838 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1839 @item -r800
1840 Assemble for R800 processor.
1841 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1842 @itemx -Wnud
1843 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1844 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1845 @itemx -Wnup
1846 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1847 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1848 @itemx -Wud
1849 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1850 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1851 @itemx -Wup
1852 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1853 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1854 @itemx -Fud
1855 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1856 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1857 @itemx -Fup
1858 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1859 @end table
1860 @end ifset
1861
1862 @c man end
1863
1864 @menu
1865 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1866 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1867 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1868 * Command Line:: Command Line
1869 * Input Files:: Input Files
1870 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1871 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1872 @end menu
1873
1874 @node Manual
1875 @section Structure of this Manual
1876
1877 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1878 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1879 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1880 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1881 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1882
1883 @ifclear GENERIC
1884 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1885 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1886 @end ifclear
1887 @ifset GENERIC
1888 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1889 various flavors of the assembler.
1890 @end ifset
1891
1892 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1893 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1894 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1895 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1896 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1897 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1898 particular architecture.
1899 @ifset GENERIC
1900 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1901 machine architecture manual for this information.
1902 @end ifset
1903 @ifclear GENERIC
1904 @ifset H8/300
1905 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1906 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1907 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1908 @end ifset
1909 @ifset SH
1910 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1911 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1912 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1913 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1914 @end ifset
1915 @ifset Z8000
1916 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1917 @end ifset
1918 @end ifclear
1919
1920 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1921 @ignore
1922 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1923 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1924 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1925 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1926 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1927 qualification.
1928
1929 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1930 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1931 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1932 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1933 @end ignore
1934
1935 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1936 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1937 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1938 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1939 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1940 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1941 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1942 @c directives).
1943
1944 @node GNU Assembler
1945 @section The GNU Assembler
1946
1947 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1948
1949 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1950 @ifclear GENERIC
1951 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1952 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1953 @end ifclear
1954 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1955 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1956 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1957 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1958 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1959
1960 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1961 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1962 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1963 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1964 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1965 machine would assemble.
1966 @ifset VAX
1967 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1968 @end ifset
1969 @ifset M680X0
1970 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1971 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1972 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1973 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1974 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1975 @end ifset
1976
1977 @c man end
1978
1979 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1980 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1981 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1982
1983 @node Object Formats
1984 @section Object File Formats
1985
1986 @cindex object file format
1987 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1988 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1989 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1990 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1991 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1992 @ifclear GENERIC
1993 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1994 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1995 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1996 @end ifclear
1997 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1998 @ifset I960
1999 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
2000 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
2001 @end ifset
2002 @ifset HPPA
2003 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
2004 SOM or ELF format object files.
2005 @end ifset
2006 @end ifclear
2007
2008 @node Command Line
2009 @section Command Line
2010
2011 @cindex command line conventions
2012
2013 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
2014 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
2015 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
2016 significant.
2017
2018 @cindex standard input, as input file
2019 @kindex --
2020 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
2021 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2022
2023 @cindex options, command line
2024 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
2025 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2026 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2027 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2028 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2029
2030 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2031 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2032 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2033 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2034
2035 @smallexample
2036 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2037 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2038 @end smallexample
2039
2040 @node Input Files
2041 @section Input Files
2042
2043 @cindex input
2044 @cindex source program
2045 @cindex files, input
2046 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2047 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2048 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2049 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2050
2051 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2052 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2053 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2054 order specified.
2055
2056 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2057 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2058 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2059 (The standard input is also a file.)
2060
2061 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2062 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2063 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2064 is taken to be an input file name.
2065
2066 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2067 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2068 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2069 to assemble.
2070
2071 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2072 in your command line.
2073
2074 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2075 file.
2076
2077 @c man end
2078
2079 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2080
2081 @cindex input file linenumbers
2082 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2083 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2084 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2085 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2086 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2087
2088 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2089 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2090
2091 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2092 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2093 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2094 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2095 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2096 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2097
2098 @node Object
2099 @section Output (Object) File
2100
2101 @cindex object file
2102 @cindex output file
2103 @kindex a.out
2104 @kindex .o
2105 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2106 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2107 is the object file. Its default name is
2108 @ifclear BOUT
2109 @code{a.out}.
2110 @end ifclear
2111 @ifset BOUT
2112 @ifset GENERIC
2113 @code{a.out}, or
2114 @end ifset
2115 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2116 @end ifset
2117 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2118 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2119 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2120 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2121 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2122
2123 @cindex linker
2124 @kindex ld
2125 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2126 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2127 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2128 information for the debugger.
2129
2130 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2131 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2132
2133 @node Errors
2134 @section Error and Warning Messages
2135
2136 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2137
2138 @cindex error messages
2139 @cindex warning messages
2140 @cindex messages from assembler
2141 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2142 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2143 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2144 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2145 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2146
2147 @c man end
2148
2149 @cindex format of warning messages
2150 Warning messages have the format
2151
2152 @smallexample
2153 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2154 @end smallexample
2155
2156 @noindent
2157 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2158 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2159 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2160 @ifset GENERIC
2161 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2162 @end ifset
2163 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2164 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2165 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2166
2167 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2168 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2169
2170 @smallexample
2171 .file 2 "bar.c"
2172 error_assembler_source
2173 .file "foo.c"
2174 .line 30
2175 error_c_source
2176 @end smallexample
2177
2178 produces this output:
2179
2180 @smallexample
2181 Assembler messages:
2182 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2183 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2184 @end smallexample
2185
2186 @cindex format of error messages
2187 Error messages have the format
2188
2189 @smallexample
2190 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2191 @end smallexample
2192
2193 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2194 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2195 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2196
2197 @node Invoking
2198 @chapter Command-Line Options
2199
2200 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2201 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2202 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2203 for options specific
2204 @ifclear GENERIC
2205 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2206 @end ifclear
2207 @ifset GENERIC
2208 to particular machine architectures.
2209 @end ifset
2210
2211 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2212
2213 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2214 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2215 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2216 by commas. For example:
2217
2218 @smallexample
2219 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2220 @end smallexample
2221
2222 @noindent
2223 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2224 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2225 local symbols in the symbol table).
2226
2227 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2228 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2229 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2230 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2231 assembler.)
2232
2233 @c man end
2234
2235 @menu
2236 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2237 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2238 * D:: -D for compatibility
2239 * f:: -f to work faster
2240 * I:: -I for .include search path
2241 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2242 * K:: -K for compatibility
2243 @end ifclear
2244 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2245 * K:: -K for difference tables
2246 @end ifset
2247
2248 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2249 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2250 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2251 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2252 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2253 * o:: -o to name the object file
2254 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2255 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2256 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2257 * v:: -v to announce version
2258 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2259 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2260 @end menu
2261
2262 @node a
2263 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2264
2265 @kindex -a
2266 @kindex -ac
2267 @kindex -ad
2268 @kindex -ag
2269 @kindex -ah
2270 @kindex -al
2271 @kindex -an
2272 @kindex -as
2273 @cindex listings, enabling
2274 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2275
2276 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2277 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2278 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2279 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2280 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2281 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2282 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2283 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2284 also.
2285
2286 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2287 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2288
2289 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2290 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2291 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2292 omitted from the listing.
2293
2294 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2295 listing.
2296
2297 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2298 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2299 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2300 @code{.sbttl}.
2301 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2302 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2303 listing-control directives have no effect.
2304
2305 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2306 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2307
2308 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2309 because it
2310 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2311 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2312 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2313 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2314 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2315
2316 @node alternate
2317 @section @option{--alternate}
2318
2319 @kindex --alternate
2320 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2321
2322 @node D
2323 @section @option{-D}
2324
2325 @kindex -D
2326 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2327 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2328 @command{@value{AS}}.
2329
2330 @node f
2331 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2332
2333 @kindex -f
2334 @cindex trusted compiler
2335 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2336 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2337 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2338 and comment preprocessing on
2339 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2340 ,Preprocessing}.
2341
2342 @quotation
2343 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2344 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2345 not work correctly.
2346 @end quotation
2347
2348 @node I
2349 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2350
2351 @kindex -I @var{path}
2352 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2353 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2354 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2355 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2356 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2357 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2358 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2359 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2360 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2361 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2362
2363 @node K
2364 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2365
2366 @kindex -K
2367 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2368 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2369 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2370 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2371 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2372 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2373 alteration on other platforms.
2374 @end ifclear
2375
2376 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2377 @cindex difference tables, warning
2378 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2379 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2380 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2381 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2382 is done.
2383 @end ifset
2384
2385 @node L
2386 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2387
2388 @kindex -L
2389 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2390 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2391 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2392 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2393 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2394 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2395 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2396 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2397
2398 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2399 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2400 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2401
2402 @node listing
2403 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2404
2405 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2406 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2407 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2408 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2409 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2410 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2411 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2412 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2413
2414 @table @gcctabopt
2415 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2416 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2417 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2418 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2419 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2420
2421 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2422 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2423 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2424 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2425 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2426 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2427 switch is used the default is to one.
2428
2429 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2430 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2431 @cindex Width of source line output
2432 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2433 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2434 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2435
2436 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2437 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2438 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2439 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2440 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2441 @end table
2442
2443 @node M
2444 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2445
2446 @kindex -M
2447 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2448 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2449 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2450 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2451 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2452 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2453 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2454 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2455 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2456
2457 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2458 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2459 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2460 individually. These are:
2461
2462 @itemize @bullet
2463 @item global symbols in common section
2464
2465 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2466 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2467 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2468 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2469 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2470
2471 @item complex relocations
2472
2473 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2474 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2475 are not support by other object file formats.
2476
2477 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2478
2479 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2480 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2481 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2482 script.
2483
2484 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2485
2486 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2487 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2488
2489 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2490
2491 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2492 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2493 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2494 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2495 assigned within a linker script.
2496 @end itemize
2497
2498 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2499 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2500 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2501
2502 @itemize @bullet
2503
2504 @item EBCDIC strings
2505
2506 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2507
2508 @item packed binary coded decimal
2509
2510 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2511 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2512
2513 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2514
2515 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2516
2517 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2518
2519 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2520
2521 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2522
2523 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2524 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2525 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2526 these options serve no purpose.
2527
2528 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2529
2530 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2531 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2532 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2533
2534 @item other @code{OPT} options
2535
2536 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2537 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2538
2539 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2540
2541 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2542 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2543
2544 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2545
2546 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2547
2548 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2549
2550 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2551
2552 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2553
2554 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2555
2556 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2557
2558 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2559
2560 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2561
2562 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2563
2564 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2565
2566 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2567
2568 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2569
2570 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2571
2572 @end itemize
2573
2574 @node MD
2575 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2576
2577 @kindex --MD
2578 @cindex dependency tracking
2579 @cindex make rules
2580
2581 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2582 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2583 dependencies of the main source file.
2584
2585 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2586
2587 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2588
2589 @node no-pad-sections
2590 @section Output Section Padding
2591 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2592 @cindex output section padding
2593 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2594 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2595 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2596 disable this behaviour.
2597
2598 @node o
2599 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2600
2601 @kindex -o
2602 @cindex naming object file
2603 @cindex object file name
2604 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2605 default it has the name
2606 @ifset GENERIC
2607 @ifset I960
2608 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2609 @end ifset
2610 @ifclear I960
2611 @file{a.out}.
2612 @end ifclear
2613 @end ifset
2614 @ifclear GENERIC
2615 @ifset I960
2616 @file{b.out}.
2617 @end ifset
2618 @ifclear I960
2619 @file{a.out}.
2620 @end ifclear
2621 @end ifclear
2622 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2623 object file a different name.
2624
2625 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2626 existing file of the same name.
2627
2628 @node R
2629 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2630
2631 @kindex -R
2632 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2633 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2634 @cindex joining text and data sections
2635 @cindex merging text and data sections
2636 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2637 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2638 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2639 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2640 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2641 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2642
2643 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2644 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2645 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2646 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2647
2648 @ifset COFF-ELF
2649 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2650 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2651 @samp{.data}.
2652 @end ifset
2653
2654 @ifset HPPA
2655 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2656 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2657 @end ifset
2658
2659 @node statistics
2660 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2661
2662 @kindex --statistics
2663 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2664 @cindex time, total for assembly
2665 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2666 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2667 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2668 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2669 seconds).
2670
2671 @node traditional-format
2672 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2673
2674 @kindex --traditional-format
2675 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2676 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2677 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2678
2679 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2680 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2681
2682 @node v
2683 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2684
2685 @kindex -v
2686 @kindex -version
2687 @cindex assembler version
2688 @cindex version of assembler
2689 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2690 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2691 command line.
2692
2693 @node W
2694 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2695
2696 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2697 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2698 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2699 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2700
2701 @kindex -W
2702 @kindex --no-warn
2703 @cindex suppressing warnings
2704 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2705 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2706 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2707 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2708 are still reported.
2709
2710 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2711 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2712 @cindex warnings, causing error
2713 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2714 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2715
2716 @kindex --warn
2717 @cindex warnings, switching on
2718 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2719 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2720
2721 @node Z
2722 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2723 @cindex object file, after errors
2724 @cindex errors, continuing after
2725 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2726 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2727 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2728 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2729 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2730 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2731
2732 @node Syntax
2733 @chapter Syntax
2734
2735 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2736 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2737 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2738 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2739 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2740 @ifclear VAX
2741 assembler.
2742 @end ifclear
2743 @ifset VAX
2744 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2745 @end ifset
2746
2747 @menu
2748 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2749 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2750 * Comments:: Comments
2751 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2752 * Statements:: Statements
2753 * Constants:: Constants
2754 @end menu
2755
2756 @node Preprocessing
2757 @section Preprocessing
2758
2759 @cindex preprocessing
2760 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2761 @itemize @bullet
2762 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2763 @item
2764 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2765 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2766 a single space.
2767
2768 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2769 @item
2770 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2771 appropriate number of newlines.
2772
2773 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2774 @item
2775 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2776 @end itemize
2777
2778 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2779 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2780 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2781 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2782 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2783 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2784 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2785
2786 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2787 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2788 preprocessed.
2789
2790 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2791 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2792 @kindex #NO_APP
2793 @kindex #APP
2794 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2795 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2796 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2797 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2798 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2799 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2800 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2801 and whitespace.
2802
2803 @node Whitespace
2804 @section Whitespace
2805
2806 @cindex whitespace
2807 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2808 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2809 people to read. Unless within character constants
2810 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2811 as exactly one space.
2812
2813 @node Comments
2814 @section Comments
2815
2816 @cindex comments
2817 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2818 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2819
2820 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2821 This means you may not nest these comments.
2822
2823 @smallexample
2824 /*
2825 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2826 is to use this sort of comment.
2827 */
2828
2829 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2830 @end smallexample
2831
2832 @cindex line comment character
2833 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2834 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2835 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2836 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2837 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2838 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2839 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2840 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2841
2842 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2843 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2844 to specify logical line numbers:
2845
2846 @kindex #
2847 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2848 @cindex logical line numbers
2849 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2850 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2851 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2852 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2853 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2854
2855 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2856 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2857
2858 @smallexample
2859 # This is an ordinary comment.
2860 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2861 # This is logical line # 36.
2862 @end smallexample
2863 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2864 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2865
2866 @node Symbol Intro
2867 @section Symbols
2868
2869 @cindex characters used in symbols
2870 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2871 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2872 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2873 @samp{_.$}.
2874 @end ifclear
2875 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2876 @ifclear GENERIC
2877 @ifset H8
2878 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2879 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2880 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2881 symbol names.)
2882 @end ifset
2883 @end ifclear
2884 @end ifset
2885 @ifset GENERIC
2886 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2887 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2888 @end ifset
2889 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2890 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2891 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2892 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2893 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2894
2895 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2896 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2897 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2898 backslash @code{\} character.
2899 @cindex length of symbols
2900
2901 @node Statements
2902 @section Statements
2903
2904 @cindex statements, structure of
2905 @cindex line separator character
2906 @cindex statement separator character
2907
2908 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2909 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2910 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2911 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2912 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2913 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2914 exception: they do not end statements.
2915
2916 @cindex newline, required at file end
2917 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2918 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2919 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2920
2921 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2922
2923 @cindex instructions and directives
2924 @cindex directives and instructions
2925 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2926 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2927 @c 13feb91.
2928 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2929 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2930 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2931 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2932 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2933 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2934 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2935 @ifset GENERIC
2936 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2937 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2938 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2939 language.@refill
2940 @end ifset
2941
2942 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2943 @cindex label (@code{:})
2944 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2945 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2946 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2947
2948 @ifset HPPA
2949 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2950 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2951 only one label may be defined on each line.
2952 @end ifset
2953
2954 @smallexample
2955 label: .directive followed by something
2956 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2957 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2958 @end smallexample
2959
2960 @node Constants
2961 @section Constants
2962
2963 @cindex constants
2964 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2965 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2966 @smallexample
2967 @group
2968 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2969 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2970 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2971 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2972 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2973 @end group
2974 @end smallexample
2975
2976 @menu
2977 * Characters:: Character Constants
2978 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2979 @end menu
2980
2981 @node Characters
2982 @subsection Character Constants
2983
2984 @cindex character constants
2985 @cindex constants, character
2986 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2987 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2988 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2989 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2990 used in arithmetic expressions.
2991
2992 @menu
2993 * Strings:: Strings
2994 * Chars:: Characters
2995 @end menu
2996
2997 @node Strings
2998 @subsubsection Strings
2999
3000 @cindex string constants
3001 @cindex constants, string
3002 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
3003 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
3004 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
3005 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
3006 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
3007 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
3008 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
3009 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
3010
3011 @cindex escape codes, character
3012 @cindex character escape codes
3013 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
3014 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
3015 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
3016 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
3017 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
3018 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
3019 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
3020 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
3021 @table @kbd
3022 @c @item \a
3023 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3024 @c
3025 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3026 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3027 @item \b
3028 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3029
3030 @c @item \e
3031 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3032 @c
3033 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3034 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3035 @item backslash-f
3036 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3037
3038 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3039 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
3040 @item \n
3041 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3042
3043 @c @item \p
3044 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3045 @c
3046 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3047 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3048 @item \r
3049 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3050
3051 @c @item \s
3052 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3053 @c other assemblers.
3054 @c
3055 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3056 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3057 @item \t
3058 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3059
3060 @c @item \v
3061 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3062 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3063 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3064 @c
3065 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3066 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3067 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3068 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3069 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3070 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3071
3072 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3073 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3074 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3075 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3076 lower case @code{x} works.
3077
3078 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3079 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3080 @item \\
3081 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3082
3083 @c @item \'
3084 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3085 @c This is needed in single character literals
3086 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3087 @c a @samp{'}.
3088 @c
3089 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3090 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3091 @item \"
3092 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3093 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3094
3095 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3096 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3097 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3098 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3099 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3100 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3101 code and warns you of the fact.
3102 @end table
3103
3104 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3105 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3106 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3107 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3108 sequence.
3109
3110 @node Chars
3111 @subsubsection Characters
3112
3113 @cindex single character constant
3114 @cindex character, single
3115 @cindex constant, single character
3116 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3117 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3118 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3119 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3120 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3121 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3122 accent. A newline
3123 @ifclear GENERIC
3124 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3125 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3126 @end ifclear
3127 @ifset abnormal-separator
3128 @ifset H8
3129 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3130 Renesas SH)
3131 @end ifset
3132 @end ifset
3133 @end ifclear
3134 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3135 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3136 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3137 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3138 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3139
3140 @node Numbers
3141 @subsection Number Constants
3142
3143 @cindex constants, number
3144 @cindex number constants
3145 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3146 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3147 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3148 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3149 are floating point numbers, described below.
3150
3151 @menu
3152 * Integers:: Integers
3153 * Bignums:: Bignums
3154 * Flonums:: Flonums
3155 @ifclear GENERIC
3156 @ifset I960
3157 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3158 @end ifset
3159 @end ifclear
3160 @end menu
3161
3162 @node Integers
3163 @subsubsection Integers
3164 @cindex integers
3165 @cindex constants, integer
3166
3167 @cindex binary integers
3168 @cindex integers, binary
3169 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3170 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3171
3172 @cindex octal integers
3173 @cindex integers, octal
3174 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3175 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3176
3177 @cindex decimal integers
3178 @cindex integers, decimal
3179 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3180 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3181
3182 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3183 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3184 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3185 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3186
3187 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3188 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3189 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3190
3191 @node Bignums
3192 @subsubsection Bignums
3193
3194 @cindex bignums
3195 @cindex constants, bignum
3196 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3197 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3198 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3199 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3200
3201 @node Flonums
3202 @subsubsection Flonums
3203 @cindex flonums
3204 @cindex floating point numbers
3205 @cindex constants, floating point
3206
3207 @cindex precision, floating point
3208 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3209 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3210 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3211 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3212 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3213 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3214
3215 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3216 @itemize @bullet
3217 @item
3218 The digit @samp{0}.
3219 @ifset HPPA
3220 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3221 @end ifset
3222
3223 @item
3224 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3225 @ifset GENERIC
3226 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3227 @ignore
3228 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3229 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3230 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3231 @end ignore
3232
3233 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3234 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3235 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3236
3237 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3238 (in upper or lower case).
3239
3240 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3241 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3242
3243 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3244 @end ifset
3245 @ifclear GENERIC
3246 @ifset ARC
3247 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3248 @end ifset
3249 @ifset H8
3250 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3251 @end ifset
3252 @ifset HPPA
3253 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3254 @end ifset
3255 @ifset I960
3256 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3257 @end ifset
3258 @end ifclear
3259
3260 @item
3261 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3262
3263 @item
3264 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3265
3266 @item
3267 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3268 or more decimal digits.
3269
3270 @item
3271 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3272
3273 @itemize @bullet
3274 @item
3275 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3276 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3277 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3278 @item
3279 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3280 @item
3281 One or more decimal digits.
3282 @end itemize
3283
3284 @end itemize
3285
3286 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3287 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3288
3289 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3290 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3291 @command{@value{AS}}.
3292
3293 @ifclear GENERIC
3294 @ifset I960
3295 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3296 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3297 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3298 @node Bit Fields
3299 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3300
3301 @cindex bit fields
3302 @cindex constants, bit field
3303 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3304 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3305 @example
3306 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3307 @end example
3308 @noindent
3309 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3310 @var{value}.
3311
3312 The resulting number is then packed
3313 @ifset GENERIC
3314 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3315 (in host-dependent byte order)
3316 @end ifset
3317 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3318 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3319 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3320 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3321 least significant digits.@refill
3322
3323 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3324 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3325 @end ifset
3326 @end ifclear
3327
3328 @node Sections
3329 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3330 @cindex sections
3331 @cindex relocation
3332
3333 @menu
3334 * Secs Background:: Background
3335 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3336 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3337 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3338 * bss:: bss Section
3339 @end menu
3340
3341 @node Secs Background
3342 @section Background
3343
3344 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3345 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3346 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3347
3348 @cindex linker, and assembler
3349 @cindex assembler, and linker
3350 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3351 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3352 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3353 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3354 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3355 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3356 sections.
3357
3358 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3359 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3360 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3361 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3362 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3363 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3364 the proper run-time addresses.
3365 @ifset H8
3366 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3367 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3368 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3369 @end ifset
3370
3371 @cindex standard assembler sections
3372 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3373 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3374 @dfn{bss} sections.
3375
3376 @ifset COFF-ELF
3377 @ifset GENERIC
3378 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3379 @end ifset
3380 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3381 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3382 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3383 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3384 @end ifset
3385
3386 @ifset HPPA
3387 @ifset GENERIC
3388 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3389 @end ifset
3390 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3391 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3392 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3393 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3394 assembler directives.
3395
3396 @ifset SOM
3397 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3398 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3399 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3400 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3401 @end ifset
3402 @end ifset
3403
3404 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3405 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3406
3407 @ifset HPPA
3408 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3409 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3410 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3411 @end ifset
3412
3413 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3414 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3415 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3416 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3417 file is mentioned:
3418 @itemize @bullet
3419 @item
3420 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3421 an address?
3422 @item
3423 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3424 @item
3425 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3426 @display
3427 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3428 @end display
3429 @item
3430 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3431 @end itemize
3432
3433 @cindex addresses, format of
3434 @cindex section-relative addressing
3435 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3436 @display
3437 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3438 @end display
3439 @noindent
3440 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3441 nature.
3442 @ifset SOM
3443 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3444 symbol-relative instead.)
3445 @end ifset
3446
3447 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3448 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3449
3450 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3451 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3452 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3453 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3454 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3455 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3456 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3457 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3458 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3459
3460 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3461 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3462 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3463 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3464 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3465 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3466 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3467
3468 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3469 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3470 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3471 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3472 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3473 data and bss sections.
3474
3475 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3476 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3477
3478 @node Ld Sections
3479 @section Linker Sections
3480 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3481
3482 @table @strong
3483
3484 @ifset COFF-ELF
3485 @cindex named sections
3486 @cindex sections, named
3487 @item named sections
3488 @end ifset
3489 @ifset aout-bout
3490 @cindex text section
3491 @cindex data section
3492 @itemx text section
3493 @itemx data section
3494 @end ifset
3495 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3496 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3497 true of another.
3498 @c @ifset aout-bout
3499 When the program is running, however, it is
3500 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3501 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3502 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3503 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3504 in the data section.
3505 @c @end ifset
3506
3507 @cindex bss section
3508 @item bss section
3509 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3510 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3511 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3512 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3513 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3514 those explicit zeros from object files.
3515
3516 @cindex absolute section
3517 @item absolute section
3518 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3519 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3520 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3521 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3522
3523 @cindex undefined section
3524 @item undefined section
3525 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3526 the preceding sections.
3527 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3528 @end table
3529
3530 @cindex relocation example
3531 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3532 @ifset COFF-ELF
3533 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3534 @end ifset
3535 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3536
3537 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3538 @ifnottex
3539 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3540 @smallexample
3541 +-----+----+--+
3542 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3543 +-----+----+--+
3544
3545 text data bss
3546 seg. seg. seg.
3547
3548 +---+---+---+
3549 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3550 +---+---+---+
3551
3552 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3553 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3554 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3555
3556 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3557 @end smallexample
3558 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3559 @end ifnottex
3560 @need 5000
3561 @tex
3562 \bigskip
3563 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3564 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3565 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3566
3567 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3568 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3569 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3570
3571 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3572 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3573 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3574 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3575 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3576
3577 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3578 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3579
3580 @end tex
3581 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3582
3583 @node As Sections
3584 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3585
3586 @cindex internal assembler sections
3587 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3588 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3589 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3590 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3591 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3592 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3593 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3594 section-relative address.
3595
3596 @table @b
3597 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3598 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3599 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3600 bug in the assembler.
3601
3602 @cindex expr (internal section)
3603 @item expr section
3604 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3605 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3606 it in the expr section.
3607 @c FIXME item debug
3608 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3609 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3610 @c FIXME item register
3611 @end table
3612
3613 @node Sub-Sections
3614 @section Sub-Sections
3615
3616 @cindex numbered subsections
3617 @cindex grouping data
3618 @ifset aout-bout
3619 Assembled bytes
3620 @ifset COFF-ELF
3621 conventionally
3622 @end ifset
3623 fall into two sections: text and data.
3624 @end ifset
3625 You may have separate groups of
3626 @ifset GENERIC
3627 data in named sections
3628 @end ifset
3629 @ifclear GENERIC
3630 @ifclear aout-bout
3631 data in named sections
3632 @end ifclear
3633 @ifset aout-bout
3634 text or data
3635 @end ifset
3636 @end ifclear
3637 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3638 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3639 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3640 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3641 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3642 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3643 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3644 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3645 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3646 constants being output.
3647
3648 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3649 goes in subsection number zero.
3650
3651 @ifset GENERIC
3652 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3653 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3654 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3655 @end ifset
3656 @ifclear GENERIC
3657 @ifset H8
3658 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3659 boundary (two bytes).
3660 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3661 @end ifset
3662 @ifset I960
3663 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3664 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3665 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3666 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3667 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3668 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3669 @end ifset
3670 @end ifclear
3671
3672 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3673 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3674 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3675 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3676 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3677 data subsections as a data section.
3678
3679 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3680 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3681 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3682 @ifset COFF
3683 @ifset GENERIC
3684 When generating COFF output, you
3685 @end ifset
3686 @ifclear GENERIC
3687 You
3688 @end ifclear
3689 can also use an extra subsection
3690 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3691 @var{expression}}.
3692 @end ifset
3693 @ifset ELF
3694 @ifset GENERIC
3695 When generating ELF output, you
3696 @end ifset
3697 @ifclear GENERIC
3698 You
3699 @end ifclear
3700 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3701 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3702 @end ifset
3703 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3704 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3705 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3706 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3707 @smallexample
3708 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3709 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3710 .text 1
3711 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3712 .data 0
3713 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3714 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3715 .text 0
3716 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3717 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3718 @end smallexample
3719
3720 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3721 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3722 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3723 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3724 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3725 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3726 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3727
3728 @node bss
3729 @section bss Section
3730
3731 @cindex bss section
3732 @cindex common variable storage
3733 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3734 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3735 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3736 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3737 section are zeroed bytes.
3738
3739 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3740 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3741
3742 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3743 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3744
3745 @ifset GENERIC
3746 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3747 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3748 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3749 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3750 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3751 @end ifset
3752
3753 @node Symbols
3754 @chapter Symbols
3755
3756 @cindex symbols
3757 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3758 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3759 to debug.
3760
3761 @quotation
3762 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3763 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3764 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3765 @end quotation
3766
3767 @menu
3768 * Labels:: Labels
3769 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3770 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3771 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3772 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3773 @end menu
3774
3775 @node Labels
3776 @section Labels
3777
3778 @cindex labels
3779 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3780 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3781 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3782 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3783 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3784 definitions.
3785
3786 @ifset HPPA
3787 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3788 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3789 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3790 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3791 @end ifset
3792
3793 @node Setting Symbols
3794 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3795
3796 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3797 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3798 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3799 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3800 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3801 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3802 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3803 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3804
3805 @ifset Blackfin
3806 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3807 @end ifset
3808
3809 @node Symbol Names
3810 @section Symbol Names
3811
3812 @cindex symbol names
3813 @cindex names, symbol
3814 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3815 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3816 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3817 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3818 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3819 particular target machine), and underscores.
3820 @end ifclear
3821 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3822 @ifset H8
3823 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3824 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3825 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3826 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3827 @end ifset
3828 @end ifset
3829
3830 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3831 than @code{Foo}.
3832
3833 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3834 Local Labels. See below.
3835
3836 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3837 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3838 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3839 currently supported.
3840
3841 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3842 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3843 in a program.
3844
3845 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3846
3847 @cindex local symbol names
3848 @cindex symbol names, local
3849 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3850 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3851 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3852 set of local label prefixes.
3853 @ifset HPPA
3854 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3855 @end ifset
3856
3857 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3858 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3859 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3860 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3861
3862 @subheading Local Labels
3863
3864 @cindex local labels
3865 @cindex temporary symbol names
3866 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3867 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3868 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3869 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3870 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3871 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3872 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3873 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3874 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3875 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3876
3877 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3878 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3879 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3880 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3881 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3882 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3883 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3884
3885 Here is an example:
3886
3887 @smallexample
3888 1: branch 1f
3889 2: branch 1b
3890 1: branch 2f
3891 2: branch 1b
3892 @end smallexample
3893
3894 Which is the equivalent of:
3895
3896 @smallexample
3897 label_1: branch label_3
3898 label_2: branch label_1
3899 label_3: branch label_4
3900 label_4: branch label_3
3901 @end smallexample
3902
3903 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3904 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3905 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3906 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3907 these parts:
3908
3909 @table @code
3910 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3911 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3912 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3913 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3914 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3915 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3916 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3917 you may use them in debugging.
3918
3919 @item @var{number}
3920 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3921 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3922
3923 @item @kbd{C-B}
3924 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3925 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3926
3927 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3928 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3929 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3930 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3931 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3932 @end table
3933
3934 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3935 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3936
3937 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3938 @cindex dollar local symbols
3939
3940 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3941 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3942 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3943 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3944 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3945 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3946
3947 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3948 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3949 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3950
3951 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3952 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3953 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3954 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3955
3956 @node Dot
3957 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3958
3959 @cindex dot (symbol)
3960 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3961 @cindex current address
3962 @cindex location counter
3963 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3964 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3965 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3966 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3967 directive.
3968 @ifclear no-space-dir
3969 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3970 @samp{.space 4}.
3971 @end ifclear
3972
3973 @node Symbol Attributes
3974 @section Symbol Attributes
3975
3976 @cindex symbol attributes
3977 @cindex attributes, symbol
3978 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3979 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3980 attributes.
3981 @ifset INTERNALS
3982 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3983 @end ifset
3984
3985 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3986 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3987 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3988 would want.
3989
3990 @menu
3991 * Symbol Value:: Value
3992 * Symbol Type:: Type
3993 @ifset aout-bout
3994 @ifset GENERIC
3995 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3996 @end ifset
3997 @ifclear GENERIC
3998 @ifclear BOUT
3999 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4000 @end ifclear
4001 @ifset BOUT
4002 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
4003 @end ifset
4004 @end ifclear
4005 @end ifset
4006 @ifset COFF
4007 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
4008 @end ifset
4009 @ifset SOM
4010 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
4011 @end ifset
4012 @end menu
4013
4014 @node Symbol Value
4015 @subsection Value
4016
4017 @cindex value of a symbol
4018 @cindex symbol value
4019 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
4020 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
4021 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4022 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4023 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4024 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4025 called absolute.
4026
4027 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
4028 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4029 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4030 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4031 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4032 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4033 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4034 allocated storage.
4035
4036 @node Symbol Type
4037 @subsection Type
4038
4039 @cindex type of a symbol
4040 @cindex symbol type
4041 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4042 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4043 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4044 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4045
4046 @ifset aout-bout
4047 @ifclear GENERIC
4048 @ifset BOUT
4049 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
4050 @c better if it were available outside examples.
4051 @need 1000
4052 @node a.out Symbols
4053 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
4054
4055 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
4056 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
4057 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
4058 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
4059 @code{b.out}.
4060
4061 @end ifset
4062 @ifclear BOUT
4063 @node a.out Symbols
4064 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4065
4066 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4067 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4068
4069 @end ifclear
4070 @end ifclear
4071 @ifset GENERIC
4072 @node a.out Symbols
4073 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4074
4075 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4076 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4077
4078 @end ifset
4079 @menu
4080 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4081 * Symbol Other:: Other
4082 @end menu
4083
4084 @node Symbol Desc
4085 @subsubsection Descriptor
4086
4087 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4088 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4089 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4090 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4091 @command{@value{AS}}.
4092
4093 @node Symbol Other
4094 @subsubsection Other
4095
4096 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4097 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4098 @end ifset
4099
4100 @ifset COFF
4101 @node COFF Symbols
4102 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4103
4104 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4105 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4106
4107 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4108 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4109 @code{.endef} directives.
4110
4111 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4112
4113 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4114 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4115 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4116
4117 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4118
4119 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4120 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4121 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4122 table information for COFF.
4123 @end ifset
4124
4125 @ifset SOM
4126 @node SOM Symbols
4127 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4128
4129 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4130 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4131
4132 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4133 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4134
4135 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4136 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4137 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4138 @end ifset
4139
4140 @node Expressions
4141 @chapter Expressions
4142
4143 @cindex expressions
4144 @cindex addresses
4145 @cindex numeric values
4146 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4147 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4148
4149 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4150 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4151 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4152 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4153 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4154 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4155
4156 @menu
4157 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4158 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4159 @end menu
4160
4161 @node Empty Exprs
4162 @section Empty Expressions
4163
4164 @cindex empty expressions
4165 @cindex expressions, empty
4166 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4167 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4168 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4169 is compatible with other assemblers.
4170
4171 @node Integer Exprs
4172 @section Integer Expressions
4173
4174 @cindex integer expressions
4175 @cindex expressions, integer
4176 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4177 by @emph{operators}.
4178
4179 @menu
4180 * Arguments:: Arguments
4181 * Operators:: Operators
4182 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4183 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4184 @end menu
4185
4186 @node Arguments
4187 @subsection Arguments
4188
4189 @cindex expression arguments
4190 @cindex arguments in expressions
4191 @cindex operands in expressions
4192 @cindex arithmetic operands
4193 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4194 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4195 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4196 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4197 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4198 instruction operands.
4199
4200 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4201 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4202 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4203 integer.
4204
4205 Numbers are usually integers.
4206
4207 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4208 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4209 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4210 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4211 assemblers.
4212
4213 @cindex subexpressions
4214 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4215 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4216 operator followed by an argument.
4217
4218 @node Operators
4219 @subsection Operators
4220
4221 @cindex operators, in expressions
4222 @cindex arithmetic functions
4223 @cindex functions, in expressions
4224 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4225 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4226 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4227 whitespace.
4228
4229 @node Prefix Ops
4230 @subsection Prefix Operator
4231
4232 @cindex prefix operators
4233 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4234 one argument, which must be absolute.
4235
4236 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4237 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4238 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4239 @tex
4240 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4241 @end tex
4242
4243 @table @code
4244 @item -
4245 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4246 @item ~
4247 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4248 @end table
4249
4250 @tex
4251 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4252 @end tex
4253
4254 @node Infix Ops
4255 @subsection Infix Operators
4256
4257 @cindex infix operators
4258 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4259 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4260 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4261 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4262 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4263
4264 @enumerate
4265 @cindex operator precedence
4266 @cindex precedence of operators
4267
4268 @item
4269 Highest Precedence
4270
4271 @table @code
4272 @item *
4273 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4274
4275 @item /
4276 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4277
4278 @item %
4279 @dfn{Remainder}.
4280
4281 @item <<
4282 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4283
4284 @item >>
4285 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4286 @end table
4287
4288 @item
4289 Intermediate precedence
4290
4291 @table @code
4292 @item |
4293
4294 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4295
4296 @item &
4297 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4298
4299 @item ^
4300 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4301
4302 @item !
4303 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4304 @end table
4305
4306 @item
4307 Low Precedence
4308
4309 @table @code
4310 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4311 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4312 @cindex arguments for addition
4313 @item +
4314 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4315 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4316 sections.
4317
4318 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4319 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4320 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4321 @item -
4322 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4323 result has the section of the left argument.
4324 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4325 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4326 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4327
4328 @cindex comparison expressions
4329 @cindex expressions, comparison
4330 @item ==
4331 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4332 @item <>
4333 @itemx !=
4334 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4335 @item <
4336 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4337 @item >
4338 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4339 @item >=
4340 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4341 @item <=
4342 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4343
4344 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4345 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4346 perform signed comparisons.
4347 @end table
4348
4349 @item Lowest Precedence
4350
4351 @table @code
4352 @item &&
4353 @dfn{Logical And}.
4354
4355 @item ||
4356 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4357
4358 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4359 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4360 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4361 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4362
4363 @end table
4364 @end enumerate
4365
4366 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4367 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4368
4369 @node Pseudo Ops
4370 @chapter Assembler Directives
4371
4372 @cindex directives, machine independent
4373 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4374 @cindex machine independent directives
4375 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4376 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4377 in lower case.
4378
4379 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4380 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4381 @ifset GENERIC
4382 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4383 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4384 @end ifset
4385 @ifclear GENERIC
4386 @ifset machine-directives
4387 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4388 @end ifset
4389 @end ifclear
4390
4391 @menu
4392 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4393 @ifset COFF
4394 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4395 @end ifset
4396
4397 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4398 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4399 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4400 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4401 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4402 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4403 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4404 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4405 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4406 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4407 @ifset COFF
4408 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4409 @end ifset
4410 @ifset aout-bout
4411 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4412 @end ifset
4413 @ifset COFF
4414 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4415 @end ifset
4416
4417 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4418 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4419 * Else:: @code{.else}
4420 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4421 * End:: @code{.end}
4422 @ifset COFF
4423 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4424 @end ifset
4425
4426 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4427 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4428 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4429 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4430 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4431 * Err:: @code{.err}
4432 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4433 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4434 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4435 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4436 * File:: @code{.file}
4437 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4438 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4439 * Func:: @code{.func}
4440 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4441 @ifset ELF
4442 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4443 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4444 @end ifset
4445
4446 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4447 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4448 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4449 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4450 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4451 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4452 @ifset ELF
4453 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4454 @end ifset
4455
4456 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4457 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4458 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4459 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4460 @ifclear no-line-dir
4461 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4462 @end ifclear
4463
4464 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4465 * List:: @code{.list}
4466 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4467 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4468 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4469 @ifset ELF
4470 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4471 @end ifset
4472
4473 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4474 @ignore
4475 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4476 @end ignore
4477
4478 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4479 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4480 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4481 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4482 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4483 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4484 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4485 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4486 @ifset ELF
4487 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4488 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4489 @end ifset
4490
4491 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4492 @ifset ELF
4493 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4494 @end ifset
4495
4496 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4497 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4498 @ifset ELF
4499 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4500 @end ifset
4501
4502 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4503 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4504 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4505 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4506 @ifset COFF
4507 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4508 @end ifset
4509 @ifset COFF-ELF
4510 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4511 @end ifset
4512
4513 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4514 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4515 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4516 @ifset COFF-ELF
4517 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4518 @end ifset
4519 @ifclear no-space-dir
4520 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4521 @end ifclear
4522
4523 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4524 @ifclear no-space-dir
4525 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4526 @end ifclear
4527 @ifset have-stabs
4528 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4529 @end ifset
4530
4531 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4532 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4533 @ifset ELF
4534 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4535 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4536 @end ifset
4537
4538 @ifset COFF
4539 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4540 @end ifset
4541
4542 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4543 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4544 @ifset COFF-ELF
4545 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4546 @end ifset
4547
4548 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4549 @ifset COFF
4550 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4551 @end ifset
4552
4553 @ifset ELF
4554 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4555 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4556 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4557 @end ifset
4558
4559 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4560 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4561 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4562 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4563 @ifclear no-space-dir
4564 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4565 @end ifclear
4566 @ifset ELF
4567 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4568 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4569 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4570 @end ifset
4571 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4572 @end menu
4573
4574 @node Abort
4575 @section @code{.abort}
4576
4577 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4578 @cindex stopping the assembly
4579 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4580 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4581 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4582 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4583 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4584
4585 @ifset COFF
4586 @node ABORT (COFF)
4587 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4588
4589 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4590 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4591 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4592
4593 @ifset BOUT
4594 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4595 but ignores it.
4596 @end ifset
4597 @end ifset
4598
4599 @node Align
4600 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4601
4602 @cindex padding the location counter
4603 @cindex @code{align} directive
4604 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4605 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4606 required, as described below.
4607
4608 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4609 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4610 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4611 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4612 with no-op instructions.
4613
4614 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4615 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4616 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4617 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4618 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4619 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4620 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4621
4622 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4623 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4624 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4625 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4626 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4627 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4628 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4629
4630 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4631 strongarm, it is the
4632 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4633 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4634 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4635 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4636
4637 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4638 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4639 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4640 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4641 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4642
4643 @node Altmacro
4644 @section @code{.altmacro}
4645 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4646
4647 @ftable @code
4648 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4649 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4650 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4651 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4652 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4653 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4654 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4655
4656 @item String delimiters
4657 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4658 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4659
4660 @table @code
4661 @item '@var{string}'
4662 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4663
4664 @item <@var{string}>
4665 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4666 @end table
4667
4668 @item single-character string escape
4669 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4670 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4671 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4672 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4673
4674 @item Expression results as strings
4675 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4676 and use the result as a string.
4677 @end ftable
4678
4679 @node Ascii
4680 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4681
4682 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4683 @cindex string literals
4684 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4685 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4686 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4687
4688 @node Asciz
4689 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4690
4691 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4692 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4693 @cindex null-terminated strings
4694 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4695 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4696
4697 @node Balign
4698 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4699
4700 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4701 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4702 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4703 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4704 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4705 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4706 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4707
4708 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4709 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4710 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4711 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4712 with no-op instructions.
4713
4714 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4715 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4716 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4717 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4718 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4719 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4720 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4721
4722 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4723 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4724 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4725 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4726 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4727 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4728 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4729 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4730 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4731 undefined.
4732
4733 @node Bundle directives
4734 @section Bundle directives
4735 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4736 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4737 @cindex bundle
4738 @cindex instruction bundle
4739 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4740 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4741 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4742 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4743 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4744 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4745 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4746
4747 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4748 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4749 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4750 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4751 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4752 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4753 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4754 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4755 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4756 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4757 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4758
4759 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4760 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4761 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4762 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4763 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4764 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4765 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4766 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4767 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4768
4769 @cindex bundle-locked
4770 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4771 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4772 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4773 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4774 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4775 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4776 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4777 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4778 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4779 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4780 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4781 bundle size.
4782
4783 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4784 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4785 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4786 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4787 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4788 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4789
4790 @node Byte
4791 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4792
4793 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4794 @cindex integers, one byte
4795 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4796 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4797
4798 @node CFI directives
4799 @section CFI directives
4800 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4801 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4802 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4803 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4804 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4805 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4806 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4807 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4808
4809 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4810 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4811
4812 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4813 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4814
4815 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4816 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4817 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4818 redefine it will result in an error.
4819
4820 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4821 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4822 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4823 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4824 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4825 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4826
4827 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4828 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4829
4830 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4831 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4832 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4833 unwind entry previously opened by
4834 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4835
4836 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4837 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4838 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4839 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4840 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4841 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4842 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4843 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4844 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4845 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4846 no personality routine.
4847
4848 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4849 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4850 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4851 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4852 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4853 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4854
4855 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4856 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4857 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4858 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4859 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4860 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4861 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4862 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4863
4864 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4865 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4866 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4867 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4868 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4869 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4870 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4871
4872 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4873 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4874 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4875 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4876 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4877 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4878
4879 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4880 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4881 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4882 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4883 by a section directive.
4884
4885 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4886 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4887 @code{.p2align} directive.
4888
4889 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4890 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4891 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4892
4893 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4894 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4895 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4896 remains the same.
4897
4898 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4899 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4900 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4901 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4902 CFA address.
4903
4904 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4905 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4906 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4907
4908 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4909 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4910 CFA.
4911
4912 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4913 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4914
4915 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4916 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4917 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4918 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4919 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4920 code it's annotating.
4921
4922 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4923 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4924
4925 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4926 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4927 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4928 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4929
4930 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4931 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4932
4933 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4934 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4935 i.e. no restoration needed.
4936
4937 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4938 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4939 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4940 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4941 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4942 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4943 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4944
4945 @smallexample
4946 je label
4947 popq %rbx
4948 .cfi_restore %rbx
4949 popq %r12
4950 .cfi_restore %r12
4951 popq %rbp
4952 .cfi_restore %rbp
4953 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4954 ret
4955 label:
4956 /* Do something else */
4957 @end smallexample
4958
4959 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4960 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4961 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4962 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4963 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4964 we can write:
4965
4966 @smallexample
4967 je label
4968 popq %rbx
4969 .cfi_remember_state
4970 .cfi_restore %rbx
4971 popq %r12
4972 .cfi_restore %r12
4973 popq %rbp
4974 .cfi_restore %rbp
4975 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4976 ret
4977 label:
4978 .cfi_restore_state
4979 /* Do something else */
4980 @end smallexample
4981
4982 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4983 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4984 @code{.cfi} directives.
4985
4986 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4987 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4988 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4989
4990 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4991 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4992
4993 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4994 SPARC register window has been saved.
4995
4996 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4997 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4998 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4999 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
5000
5001 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
5002 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
5003 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
5004 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
5005
5006 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
5007 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
5008 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
5009 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
5010 or another register.
5011
5012 @node Comm
5013 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
5014
5015 @cindex @code{comm} directive
5016 @cindex symbol, common
5017 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
5018 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
5019 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
5020 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
5021 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
5022 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
5023 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
5024 using the largest size.
5025
5026 @ifset COFF-ELF
5027 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
5028 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
5029 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
5030 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
5031 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
5032 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
5033 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
5034 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
5035 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
5036 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
5037 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
5038 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5039 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5040 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5041 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5042 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5043 @end ifset
5044
5045 @ifset HPPA
5046 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5047 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5048 @end ifset
5049
5050 @node Data
5051 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5052
5053 @cindex @code{data} directive
5054 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5055 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5056 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5057 to zero.
5058
5059 @ifset COFF
5060 @node Def
5061 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5062
5063 @cindex @code{def} directive
5064 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5065 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5066 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5067 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5068 @ifset BOUT
5069
5070 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
5071 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
5072 but ignored.
5073 @end ifset
5074 @end ifset
5075
5076 @ifset aout-bout
5077 @node Desc
5078 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5079
5080 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5081 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5082 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5083 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5084 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5085
5086 @ifset COFF
5087 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5088 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5089 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5090 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5091 @end ifset
5092 @end ifset
5093
5094 @ifset COFF
5095 @node Dim
5096 @section @code{.dim}
5097
5098 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5099 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5100 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5101 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5102 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5103 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5104 @ifset BOUT
5105
5106 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5107 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5108 ignores it.
5109 @end ifset
5110 @end ifset
5111
5112 @node Double
5113 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5114
5115 @cindex @code{double} directive
5116 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5117 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5118 assembles floating point numbers.
5119 @ifset GENERIC
5120 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5121 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5122 @end ifset
5123 @ifclear GENERIC
5124 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5125 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5126 in @sc{ieee} format.
5127 @end ifset
5128 @end ifclear
5129
5130 @node Eject
5131 @section @code{.eject}
5132
5133 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5134 @cindex new page, in listings
5135 @cindex page, in listings
5136 @cindex listing control: new page
5137 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5138
5139 @node Else
5140 @section @code{.else}
5141
5142 @cindex @code{else} directive
5143 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5144 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5145 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5146 was false.
5147
5148 @node Elseif
5149 @section @code{.elseif}
5150
5151 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5152 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5153 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5154 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5155
5156 @node End
5157 @section @code{.end}
5158
5159 @cindex @code{end} directive
5160 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5161 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5162
5163 @ifset COFF
5164 @node Endef
5165 @section @code{.endef}
5166
5167 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5168 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5169 @code{.def}.
5170 @ifset BOUT
5171
5172 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5173 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5174 directive but ignores it.
5175 @end ifset
5176 @end ifset
5177
5178 @node Endfunc
5179 @section @code{.endfunc}
5180 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5181 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5182
5183 @node Endif
5184 @section @code{.endif}
5185
5186 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5187 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5188 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5189 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5190
5191 @node Equ
5192 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5193
5194 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5195 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5196 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5197 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5198 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5199
5200 @ifset HPPA
5201 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5202 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5203 @end ifset
5204
5205 @ifset Z80
5206 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5207 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5208 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5209 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5210 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5211 @end ifset
5212
5213 @node Equiv
5214 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5215 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5216 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5217 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5218 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5219 undefined.
5220
5221 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5222 @smallexample
5223 .ifdef SYM
5224 .err
5225 .endif
5226 .equ SYM,VAL
5227 @end smallexample
5228 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5229
5230 @node Eqv
5231 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5232 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5233 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5234 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5235 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5236 value is taken.
5237
5238 @node Err
5239 @section @code{.err}
5240 @cindex @code{err} directive
5241 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5242 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5243 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5244
5245 @node Error
5246 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5247 @cindex error directive
5248
5249 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5250 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5251 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5252 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5253
5254 @smallexample
5255 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5256 @end smallexample
5257
5258 @node Exitm
5259 @section @code{.exitm}
5260 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5261
5262 @node Extern
5263 @section @code{.extern}
5264
5265 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5266 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5267 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5268 all undefined symbols as external.
5269
5270 @node Fail
5271 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5272
5273 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5274 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5275 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5276 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5277 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5278 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5279
5280 @node File
5281 @section @code{.file}
5282 @cindex @code{file} directive
5283
5284 @ifclear no-file-dir
5285 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5286 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5287 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5288
5289 @subheading Default Version
5290
5291 @cindex logical file name
5292 @cindex file name, logical
5293 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5294 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5295
5296 @smallexample
5297 .file @var{string}
5298 @end smallexample
5299
5300 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5301 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5302 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5303 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5304 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5305
5306 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5307 @end ifclear
5308
5309 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5310 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5311
5312 @smallexample
5313 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5314 @end smallexample
5315
5316 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5317 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5318 literal.
5319
5320 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5321 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5322 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5323 entries will have.
5324
5325 @node Fill
5326 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5327
5328 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5329 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5330 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5331 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5332 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5333 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5334 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5335 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5336 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5337 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5338 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5339 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5340 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5341 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5342
5343 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5344 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5345 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5346 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5347
5348 @node Float
5349 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5350
5351 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5352 @cindex @code{float} directive
5353 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5354 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5355 @ifset GENERIC
5356 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5357 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5358 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5359 @end ifset
5360 @ifclear GENERIC
5361 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5362 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5363 in @sc{ieee} format.
5364 @end ifset
5365 @end ifclear
5366
5367 @node Func
5368 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5369 @cindex @code{func} directive
5370 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5371 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5372 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5373 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5374 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5375 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5376 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5377 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5378
5379 @node Global
5380 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5381
5382 @cindex @code{global} directive
5383 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5384 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5385 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5386 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5387 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5388 from another file linked into the same program.
5389
5390 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5391 compatibility with other assemblers.
5392
5393 @ifset HPPA
5394 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5395 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5396 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5397 @end ifset
5398
5399 @ifset ELF
5400 @node Gnu_attribute
5401 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5402 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5403
5404 @node Hidden
5405 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5406
5407 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5408 @cindex visibility
5409 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5410 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5411 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5412
5413 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5414 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5415 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5416 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5417 @end ifset
5418
5419 @node hword
5420 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5421
5422 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5423 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5424 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5425 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5426 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5427 a 16 bit number for each.
5428
5429 @ifset GENERIC
5430 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5431 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5432 @end ifset
5433 @ifclear GENERIC
5434 @ifset W32
5435 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5436 @end ifset
5437 @ifset W16
5438 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5439 @end ifset
5440 @end ifclear
5441
5442 @node Ident
5443 @section @code{.ident}
5444
5445 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5446
5447 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5448 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5449 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5450 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5451 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5452 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5453 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5454
5455 @node If
5456 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5457
5458 @cindex conditional assembly
5459 @cindex @code{if} directive
5460 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5461 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5462 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5463 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5464 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5465 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5466 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5467 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5468
5469 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5470 @table @code
5471 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5472 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5473 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5474 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5475 is considered to be undefined.
5476
5477 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5478 @item .ifb @var{text}
5479 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5480
5481 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5482 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5483 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5484 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5485 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5486 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5487 string comparison is case sensitive.
5488
5489 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5490 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5491 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5492
5493 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5494 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5495 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5496
5497 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5498 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5499 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5500 equal to zero.
5501
5502 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5503 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5504 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5505
5506 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5507 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5508 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5509 to zero.
5510
5511 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5512 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5513 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5514
5515 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5516 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5517 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5518 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5519
5520 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5521 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5522 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5523 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5524
5525 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5526 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5527 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5528 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5529 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5530 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5531 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5532
5533 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5534 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5535 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5536 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5537
5538 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5539 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5540 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5541 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5542 @end table
5543
5544 @node Incbin
5545 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5546
5547 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5548 @cindex binary files, including
5549 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5550 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5551 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5552 around @var{file}.
5553
5554 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5555 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5556 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5557 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5558 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5559
5560 @node Include
5561 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5562
5563 @cindex @code{include} directive
5564 @cindex supporting files, including
5565 @cindex files, including
5566 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5567 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5568 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5569 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5570 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5571 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5572 around @var{file}.
5573
5574 @node Int
5575 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5576
5577 @cindex @code{int} directive
5578 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5579 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5580 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5581 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5582 of target the assembly is for.
5583
5584 @ifclear GENERIC
5585 @ifset H8
5586 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5587 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5588 32-bit integers.
5589 @end ifset
5590 @end ifclear
5591
5592 @ifset ELF
5593 @node Internal
5594 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5595
5596 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5597 @cindex visibility
5598 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5599 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5600 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5601
5602 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5603 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5604 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5605 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5606 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5607 @end ifset
5608
5609 @node Irp
5610 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5611
5612 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5613 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5614 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5615 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5616 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5617 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5618 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5619 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5620
5621 For example, assembling
5622
5623 @example
5624 .irp param,1,2,3
5625 move d\param,sp@@-
5626 .endr
5627 @end example
5628
5629 is equivalent to assembling
5630
5631 @example
5632 move d1,sp@@-
5633 move d2,sp@@-
5634 move d3,sp@@-
5635 @end example
5636
5637 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5638
5639 @node Irpc
5640 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5641
5642 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5643 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5644 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5645 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5646 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5647 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5648 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5649 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5650
5651 For example, assembling
5652
5653 @example
5654 .irpc param,123
5655 move d\param,sp@@-
5656 .endr
5657 @end example
5658
5659 is equivalent to assembling
5660
5661 @example
5662 move d1,sp@@-
5663 move d2,sp@@-
5664 move d3,sp@@-
5665 @end example
5666
5667 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5668 at @xref{Macro}.
5669
5670 @node Lcomm
5671 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5672
5673 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5674 @cindex local common symbols
5675 @cindex symbols, local common
5676 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5677 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5678 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5679 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5680 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5681 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5682
5683 @ifset GENERIC
5684 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5685 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5686 @end ifset
5687
5688 @ifset HPPA
5689 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5690 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5691 @end ifset
5692
5693 @node Lflags
5694 @section @code{.lflags}
5695
5696 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5697 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5698 assemblers, but ignores it.
5699
5700 @ifclear no-line-dir
5701 @node Line
5702 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5703
5704 @cindex @code{line} directive
5705 @cindex logical line number
5706 @ifset aout-bout
5707 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5708 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5709 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5710 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5711 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5712 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5713 @end ifset
5714
5715 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5716 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5717 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5718 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5719 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5720
5721 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5722 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5723 debugging.
5724 @end ifclear
5725
5726 @node Linkonce
5727 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5728 @cindex COMDAT
5729 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5730 @cindex common sections
5731 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5732 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5733 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5734 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5735 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5736 unique.
5737
5738 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5739 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5740 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5741
5742 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5743 following strings. For example:
5744 @smallexample
5745 .linkonce same_size
5746 @end smallexample
5747 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5748
5749 @table @code
5750 @item discard
5751 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5752
5753 @item one_only
5754 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5755
5756 @item same_size
5757 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5758
5759 @item same_contents
5760 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5761 @end table
5762
5763 @node List
5764 @section @code{.list}
5765
5766 @cindex @code{list} directive
5767 @cindex listing control, turning on
5768 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5769 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5770 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5771 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5772 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5773
5774 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5775 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5776 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5777
5778 @node Ln
5779 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5780
5781 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5782 @ifclear no-line-dir
5783 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5784 @end ifclear
5785 @ifset no-line-dir
5786 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5787 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5788 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5789 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5790 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5791 @ifset BOUT
5792
5793 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5794 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5795 output format.
5796 @end ifset
5797 @end ifset
5798
5799 @node Loc
5800 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5801 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5802 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5803 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5804 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5805 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5806 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5807 the row is added.
5808
5809 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5810
5811 @table @code
5812 @item basic_block
5813 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5814 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5815
5816 @item prologue_end
5817 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5818 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5819
5820 @item epilogue_begin
5821 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5822 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5823
5824 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5825 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5826 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5827 either 0 or 1.
5828
5829 @item isa @var{value}
5830 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5831 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5832
5833 @item discriminator @var{value}
5834 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5835 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5836
5837 @item view @var{value}
5838 This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
5839 current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
5840 instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
5841 @code{.debug_line} state machine. If @var{value} is a label, both the
5842 @code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
5843 directives at the same program location. If @var{value} is the literal
5844 @code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
5845 that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
5846 location. If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
5847 the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
5848 @code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
5849
5850 @end table
5851
5852 @node Loc_mark_labels
5853 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5854 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5855 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5856 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5857 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5858 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5859 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5860 this function respectively.
5861
5862 @ifset ELF
5863 @node Local
5864 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5865
5866 @cindex @code{local} directive
5867 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5868 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5869 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5870 they will be created.
5871
5872 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5873 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5874 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5875 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5876 @end ifset
5877
5878 @node Long
5879 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5880
5881 @cindex @code{long} directive
5882 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5883
5884 @ignore
5885 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5886 @c what it really ought to do
5887 @node Lsym
5888 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5889
5890 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5891 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5892 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5893 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5894 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5895 the same as the expression value:
5896 @smallexample
5897 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5898 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5899 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5900 @end smallexample
5901 @noindent
5902 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5903 @end ignore
5904
5905 @node Macro
5906 @section @code{.macro}
5907
5908 @cindex macros
5909 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5910 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5911 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5912
5913 @example
5914 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5915 .long \from
5916 .if \to-\from
5917 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5918 .endif
5919 .endm
5920 @end example
5921
5922 @noindent
5923 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5924
5925 @example
5926 .long 0
5927 .long 1
5928 .long 2
5929 .long 3
5930 .long 4
5931 .long 5
5932 @end example
5933
5934 @ftable @code
5935 @item .macro @var{macname}
5936 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5937 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5938 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5939 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5940 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5941 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5942 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5943 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5944 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5945 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5946 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5947 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5948
5949 @table @code
5950 @item .macro comm
5951 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5952 arguments.
5953
5954 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5955 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5956 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5957 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5958 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5959
5960 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5961 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5962 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5963 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5964 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5965 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5966 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5967 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5968
5969 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5970 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5971 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5972 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5973 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5974
5975 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5976 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5977 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5978
5979 @end table
5980
5981 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5982 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5983 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5984 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5985 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5986 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5987 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5988 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5989 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5990 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5991 this macro definition:
5992
5993 @example
5994 .macro label l
5995 \l:
5996 .endm
5997 @end example
5998
5999 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
6000 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
6001 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
6002 identifier.
6003
6004 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
6005 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
6006 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
6007 length specifier like this:
6008
6009 @example
6010 .macro opcode base length
6011 \base.\length
6012 .endm
6013 @end example
6014
6015 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
6016 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
6017 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
6018
6019 There are several possible ways around this problem:
6020
6021 @table @code
6022 @item Insert white space
6023 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
6024 solution. eg:
6025
6026 @example
6027 .macro label l
6028 \l :
6029 .endm
6030 @end example
6031
6032 @item Use @samp{\()}
6033 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
6034 the following text. eg:
6035
6036 @example
6037 .macro opcode base length
6038 \base\().\length
6039 .endm
6040 @end example
6041
6042 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6043 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6044 used as a separator. eg:
6045
6046 @example
6047 .altmacro
6048 .macro label l
6049 l&:
6050 .endm
6051 @end example
6052 @end table
6053
6054 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6055 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6056 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6057
6058 @item .endm
6059 @cindex @code{endm} directive
6060 Mark the end of a macro definition.
6061
6062 @item .exitm
6063 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
6064 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6065
6066 @cindex number of macros executed
6067 @cindex macros, count executed
6068 @item \@@
6069 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6070 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6071 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6072
6073 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6074 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6075 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6076 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6077 @end ftable
6078
6079 @node MRI
6080 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6081
6082 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6083 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6084 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6085 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6086 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6087 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6088
6089 @node Noaltmacro
6090 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6091 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6092
6093 @node Nolist
6094 @section @code{.nolist}
6095
6096 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6097 @cindex listing control, turning off
6098 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6099 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6100 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6101 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6102 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6103
6104 @node Octa
6105 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6106
6107 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
6108 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6109 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6110 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6111 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6112 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6113
6114 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6115 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6116
6117 @node Offset
6118 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6119
6120 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6121 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6122 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6123 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6124 directive.
6125
6126 @node Org
6127 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6128
6129 @cindex @code{org} directive
6130 @cindex location counter, advancing
6131 @cindex advancing location counter
6132 @cindex current address, advancing
6133 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6134 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6135 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6136 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6137 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6138 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6139 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6140 is the same as the current subsection.
6141
6142 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6143 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6144 backwards.
6145
6146 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6147 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6148 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6149 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6150 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6151 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6152
6153 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6154 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6155 people's assemblers.
6156
6157 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6158 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6159 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6160 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6161
6162 @node P2align
6163 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6164
6165 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6166 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6167 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6168 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6169 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6170 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6171 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6172 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6173
6174 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6175 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6176 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
6177 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6178 with no-op instructions.
6179
6180 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6181 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6182 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6183 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6184 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6185 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6186 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6187
6188 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6189 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6190 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6191 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6192 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6193 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6194 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6195 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6196 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6197 undefined.
6198
6199 @ifset ELF
6200 @node PopSection
6201 @section @code{.popsection}
6202
6203 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6204 @cindex Section Stack
6205 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6206 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6207 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6208 (@pxref{Previous}).
6209
6210 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6211 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6212 stack.
6213 @end ifset
6214
6215 @ifset ELF
6216 @node Previous
6217 @section @code{.previous}
6218
6219 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6220 @cindex Section Stack
6221 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6222 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6223 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6224 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6225
6226 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6227 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6228 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6229 subsections). For example:
6230
6231 @smallexample
6232 .section A
6233 .subsection 1
6234 .word 0x1234
6235 .subsection 2
6236 .word 0x5678
6237 .previous
6238 .word 0x9abc
6239 @end smallexample
6240
6241 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6242 section A. Whilst:
6243
6244 @smallexample
6245 .section A
6246 .subsection 1
6247 # Now in section A subsection 1
6248 .word 0x1234
6249 .section B
6250 .subsection 0
6251 # Now in section B subsection 0
6252 .word 0x5678
6253 .subsection 1
6254 # Now in section B subsection 1
6255 .word 0x9abc
6256 .previous
6257 # Now in section B subsection 0
6258 .word 0xdef0
6259 @end smallexample
6260
6261 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6262 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6263
6264 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6265 the top section on the section stack.
6266 @end ifset
6267
6268 @node Print
6269 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6270
6271 @cindex @code{print} directive
6272 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6273 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6274
6275 @ifset ELF
6276 @node Protected
6277 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6278
6279 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6280 @cindex visibility
6281 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6282 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6283
6284 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6285 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6286 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6287 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6288 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6289 this.
6290 @end ifset
6291
6292 @node Psize
6293 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6294
6295 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6296 @cindex listing control: paper size
6297 @cindex paper size, for listings
6298 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6299 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6300
6301 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6302 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6303 default width is 200 columns.
6304
6305 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6306 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6307 @code{.eject}).
6308
6309 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6310 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6311
6312 @node Purgem
6313 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6314
6315 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6316 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6317 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6318
6319 @ifset ELF
6320 @node PushSection
6321 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6322
6323 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6324 @cindex Section Stack
6325 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6326 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6327 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6328 (@pxref{Previous}).
6329
6330 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6331 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6332 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6333 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6334 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6335 @end ifset
6336
6337 @node Quad
6338 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6339
6340 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6341 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6342 each bignum, it emits
6343 @ifclear bignum-16
6344 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6345 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6346 @cindex eight-byte integer
6347 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6348
6349 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6350 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6351 @end ifclear
6352 @ifset bignum-16
6353 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6354 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6355 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6356 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6357 @end ifset
6358
6359 @node Reloc
6360 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6361
6362 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6363 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6364 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6365 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6366 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6367 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6368 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6369 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6370 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6371 section.
6372
6373 @node Rept
6374 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6375
6376 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6377 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6378 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6379
6380 For example, assembling
6381
6382 @example
6383 .rept 3
6384 .long 0
6385 .endr
6386 @end example
6387
6388 is equivalent to assembling
6389
6390 @example
6391 .long 0
6392 .long 0
6393 .long 0
6394 @end example
6395
6396 A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated. Negative counts are not
6397 allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
6398
6399 @node Sbttl
6400 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6401
6402 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6403 @cindex subtitles for listings
6404 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6405 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6406 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6407
6408 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6409 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6410
6411 @ifset COFF
6412 @node Scl
6413 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6414
6415 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6416 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6417 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6418 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6419 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6420 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6421 symbolic debugging information.
6422 @ifset BOUT
6423
6424 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6425 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6426 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6427 @end ifset
6428 @end ifset
6429
6430 @ifset COFF-ELF
6431 @node Section
6432 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6433
6434 @cindex named section
6435 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6436 named @var{name}.
6437
6438 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6439 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6440 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6441
6442 @ifset COFF
6443 @ifset ELF
6444 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6445 @subheading COFF Version
6446 @end ifset
6447
6448 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6449 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6450 ways:
6451
6452 @smallexample
6453 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6454 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6455 @end smallexample
6456
6457 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6458 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6459
6460 @table @code
6461 @item b
6462 bss section (uninitialized data)
6463 @item n
6464 section is not loaded
6465 @item w
6466 writable section
6467 @item d
6468 data section
6469 @item e
6470 exclude section from linking
6471 @item r
6472 read-only section
6473 @item x
6474 executable section
6475 @item s
6476 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6477 @item a
6478 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6479 @item y
6480 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6481 @item 0-9
6482 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6483 @end table
6484
6485 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6486 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6487 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6488 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6489 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6490
6491 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6492 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6493 @end ifset
6494
6495 @ifset ELF
6496 @ifset COFF
6497 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6498 @subheading ELF Version
6499 @end ifset
6500
6501 @cindex Section Stack
6502 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6503 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6504 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6505 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6506
6507 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6508 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6509
6510 @smallexample
6511 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6512 @end smallexample
6513
6514 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6515 @kindex --sectname-subst
6516 @cindex section name substitution
6517 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6518 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6519 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6520
6521 @smallexample
6522 .macro exception_code
6523 .section %S.exception
6524 [exception code here]
6525 .previous
6526 .endm
6527
6528 .text
6529 [code]
6530 exception_code
6531 [...]
6532
6533 .section .init
6534 [init code]
6535 exception_code
6536 [...]
6537 @end smallexample
6538
6539 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6540 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6541 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6542 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6543 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6544 macros just for that purpose.
6545
6546 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6547 combination of the following characters:
6548
6549 @table @code
6550 @item a
6551 section is allocatable
6552 @item d
6553 section is a GNU_MBIND section
6554 @item e
6555 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6556 @item w
6557 section is writable
6558 @item x
6559 section is executable
6560 @item M
6561 section is mergeable
6562 @item S
6563 section contains zero terminated strings
6564 @item G
6565 section is a member of a section group
6566 @item T
6567 section is used for thread-local-storage
6568 @item ?
6569 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6570 @item @code{<number>}
6571 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6572 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6573 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6574 resulting value.
6575 @item @code{<target specific>}
6576 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6577 @end table
6578
6579 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6580 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6581 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6582 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6583 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6584 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6585
6586 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6587
6588 @table @code
6589 @item @@progbits
6590 section contains data
6591 @item @@nobits
6592 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6593 @item @@note
6594 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6595 @item @@init_array
6596 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6597 @item @@fini_array
6598 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6599 @item @@preinit_array
6600 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6601 @item @@@code{<number>}
6602 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6603 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6604 some targets extend this list with their own types
6605 @end table
6606
6607 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6608 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6609
6610 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6611 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6612 @code{%} character.
6613
6614 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6615 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6616 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6617
6618 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6619 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6620
6621 @smallexample
6622 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6623 @end smallexample
6624
6625 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6626 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6627 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6628 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6629 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6630 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6631 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6632 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6633 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6634
6635 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6636 be present along with an additional field like this:
6637
6638 @smallexample
6639 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6640 @end smallexample
6641
6642 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6643 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6644
6645 @table @code
6646 @item comdat
6647 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6648 @item .gnu.linkonce
6649 an alias for comdat
6650 @end table
6651
6652 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6653 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6654
6655 @smallexample
6656 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6657 @end smallexample
6658
6659 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6660 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6661 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6662 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6663 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6664 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6665
6666 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6667 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6668 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6669 executable. The section will contain data.
6670
6671 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6672 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6673
6674 @smallexample
6675 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6676 @end smallexample
6677
6678 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6679 separated flags:
6680
6681 @table @code
6682 @item #alloc
6683 section is allocatable
6684 @item #write
6685 section is writable
6686 @item #execinstr
6687 section is executable
6688 @item #exclude
6689 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6690 @item #tls
6691 section is used for thread local storage
6692 @end table
6693
6694 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6695 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6696 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6697 work.
6698 @end ifset
6699 @end ifset
6700
6701 @node Set
6702 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6703
6704 @cindex @code{set} directive
6705 @cindex symbol value, setting
6706 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6707 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6708 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6709 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6710
6711 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6712 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6713 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6714 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6715 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6716 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6717 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6718 different symbols.
6719
6720 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6721 file is the last value stored into it.
6722
6723 @ifset Z80
6724 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6725 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6726 @end ifset
6727
6728 @node Short
6729 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6730
6731 @cindex @code{short} directive
6732 @ifset GENERIC
6733 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6734 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6735
6736 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6737 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6738 @end ifset
6739 @ifclear GENERIC
6740 @ifset W16
6741 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6742 @end ifset
6743 @ifset W32
6744 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6745 a 16 bit number for each.
6746 @end ifset
6747 @end ifclear
6748
6749 @node Single
6750 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6751
6752 @cindex @code{single} directive
6753 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6754 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6755 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6756 @ifset GENERIC
6757 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6758 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6759 @end ifset
6760 @ifclear GENERIC
6761 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6762 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6763 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6764 @end ifset
6765 @end ifclear
6766
6767 @ifset COFF-ELF
6768 @node Size
6769 @section @code{.size}
6770
6771 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6772
6773 @ifset COFF
6774 @ifset ELF
6775 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6776 @subheading COFF Version
6777 @end ifset
6778
6779 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6780 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6781 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6782
6783 @smallexample
6784 .size @var{expression}
6785 @end smallexample
6786
6787 @ifset BOUT
6788 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6789 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6790 ignores it.
6791 @end ifset
6792 @end ifset
6793
6794 @ifset ELF
6795 @ifset COFF
6796 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6797 @subheading ELF Version
6798 @end ifset
6799
6800 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6801 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6802
6803 @smallexample
6804 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6805 @end smallexample
6806
6807 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6808 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6809 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6810 symbols.
6811 @end ifset
6812 @end ifset
6813
6814 @ifclear no-space-dir
6815 @node Skip
6816 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6817
6818 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6819 @cindex filling memory
6820 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6821 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6822 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6823 @samp{.space}.
6824 @end ifclear
6825
6826 @node Sleb128
6827 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6828
6829 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6830 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6831 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6832 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6833
6834 @ifclear no-space-dir
6835 @node Space
6836 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6837
6838 @cindex @code{space} directive
6839 @cindex filling memory
6840 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6841 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6842 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6843 as @samp{.skip}.
6844
6845 @ifset HPPA
6846 @quotation
6847 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6848 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6849 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6850 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6851 for a summary.
6852 @end quotation
6853 @end ifset
6854 @end ifclear
6855
6856 @ifset have-stabs
6857 @node Stab
6858 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6859
6860 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6861 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6862 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6863 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6864 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6865 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6866 Up to five fields are required:
6867
6868 @table @var
6869 @item string
6870 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6871 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6872 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6873 using this field.
6874
6875 @item type
6876 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6877 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6878 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6879
6880 @item other
6881 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6882 low 8 bits of this expression.
6883
6884 @item desc
6885 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6886 bits of this expression.
6887
6888 @item value
6889 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6890 @end table
6891
6892 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6893 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6894 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6895 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6896
6897 @table @code
6898 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6899 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6900
6901 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6902 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6903 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6904 strings.
6905
6906 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6907 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6908 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6909 assembled.
6910
6911 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6912 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6913 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6914
6915 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6916 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6917 All five fields are specified.
6918 @end table
6919 @end ifset
6920 @c end have-stabs
6921
6922 @node String
6923 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6924 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6925
6926 @cindex string, copying to object file
6927 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6928 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6929 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6930 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6931 @cindex @code{string} directive
6932 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6933 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6934 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6935 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6936
6937 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6938 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6939 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6940 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6941
6942 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6943 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6944 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6945 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6946
6947 Example:
6948 @smallexample
6949 .string32 "BYE"
6950 expands to:
6951 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6952 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6953 @end smallexample
6954
6955
6956 @node Struct
6957 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6958
6959 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6960 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6961 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6962 @smallexample
6963 .struct 0
6964 field1:
6965 .struct field1 + 4
6966 field2:
6967 .struct field2 + 4
6968 field3:
6969 @end smallexample
6970 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6971 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6972 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6973 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6974 before further assembly.
6975
6976 @ifset ELF
6977 @node SubSection
6978 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6979
6980 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6981 @cindex Section Stack
6982 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6983 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6984 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6985 (@pxref{Previous}).
6986
6987 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6988 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6989 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6990 @end ifset
6991
6992 @ifset ELF
6993 @node Symver
6994 @section @code{.symver}
6995 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6996 @cindex symbol versioning
6997 @cindex versions of symbols
6998 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6999 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
7000 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
7001 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
7002 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
7003 shared library.
7004
7005 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
7006 @smallexample
7007 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
7008 @end smallexample
7009 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
7010 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
7011 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
7012 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
7013 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
7014 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
7015 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
7016 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
7017 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
7018 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
7019 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
7020 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
7021 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
7022 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
7023
7024 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
7025 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
7026 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
7027 symbol table.
7028
7029 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7030 @smallexample
7031 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
7032 @end smallexample
7033 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
7034 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
7035 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
7036 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
7037
7038 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7039 @smallexample
7040 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
7041 @end smallexample
7042 When @var{name} is not defined within the
7043 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
7044 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7045 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7046 @end ifset
7047
7048 @ifset COFF
7049 @node Tag
7050 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7051
7052 @cindex COFF structure debugging
7053 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
7054 @cindex @code{tag} directive
7055 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7056 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7057 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7058 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7059 @ifset BOUT
7060
7061 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
7062 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
7063 ignores it.
7064 @end ifset
7065 @end ifset
7066
7067 @node Text
7068 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7069
7070 @cindex @code{text} directive
7071 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7072 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7073 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7074 is used.
7075
7076 @node Title
7077 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7078
7079 @cindex @code{title} directive
7080 @cindex listing control: title line
7081 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7082 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7083
7084 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7085 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7086
7087 @ifset COFF-ELF
7088 @node Type
7089 @section @code{.type}
7090
7091 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7092
7093 @ifset COFF
7094 @ifset ELF
7095 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7096 @subheading COFF Version
7097 @end ifset
7098
7099 @cindex COFF symbol type
7100 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7101 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7102 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7103 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7104
7105 @smallexample
7106 .type @var{int}
7107 @end smallexample
7108
7109 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7110 entry.
7111
7112 @ifset BOUT
7113 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7114 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7115 directive but ignores it.
7116 @end ifset
7117 @end ifset
7118
7119 @ifset ELF
7120 @ifset COFF
7121 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7122 @subheading ELF Version
7123 @end ifset
7124
7125 @cindex ELF symbol type
7126 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7127 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7128 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7129
7130 @smallexample
7131 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7132 @end smallexample
7133
7134 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7135 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7136 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7137 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7138
7139 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7140 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7141 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7142 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7143 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7144 assemblers.
7145
7146 The syntaxes supported are:
7147
7148 @smallexample
7149 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7150 .type <name>,#<type>
7151 .type <name>,@@<type>
7152 .type <name>,%<type>
7153 .type <name>,"<type>"
7154 @end smallexample
7155
7156 The types supported are:
7157
7158 @table @gcctabopt
7159 @item STT_FUNC
7160 @itemx function
7161 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7162
7163 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7164 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7165 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7166 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7167
7168 @item STT_OBJECT
7169 @itemx object
7170 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7171
7172 @item STT_TLS
7173 @itemx tls_object
7174 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7175
7176 @item STT_COMMON
7177 @itemx common
7178 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7179
7180 @item STT_NOTYPE
7181 @itemx notype
7182 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7183
7184 @item gnu_unique_object
7185 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7186 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7187 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7188 systems).
7189
7190 @end table
7191
7192 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7193
7194 @end ifset
7195 @end ifset
7196
7197 @node Uleb128
7198 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7199
7200 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7201 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7202 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7203 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7204
7205 @ifset COFF
7206 @node Val
7207 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7208
7209 @cindex @code{val} directive
7210 @cindex COFF value attribute
7211 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7212 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7213 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7214 entry.
7215 @ifset BOUT
7216
7217 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7218 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7219 @end ifset
7220 @end ifset
7221
7222 @ifset ELF
7223 @node Version
7224 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7225
7226 @cindex @code{version} directive
7227 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7228 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7229 @end ifset
7230
7231 @ifset ELF
7232 @node VTableEntry
7233 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7234
7235 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7236 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7237 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7238
7239 @node VTableInherit
7240 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7241
7242 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7243 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7244 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7245 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7246 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7247 @end ifset
7248
7249 @node Warning
7250 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7251 @cindex warning directive
7252 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7253 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7254
7255 @node Weak
7256 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7257
7258 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7259 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7260 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7261
7262 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7263 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7264 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7265
7266 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7267 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7268 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7269
7270 @node Weakref
7271 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7272
7273 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7274 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7275 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7276 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7277 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7278 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7279
7280 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7281 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7282 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7283 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7284 had the references to the alias removed.
7285
7286 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7287 within the assembler.
7288
7289 @node Word
7290 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7291
7292 @cindex @code{word} directive
7293 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7294 separated by commas.
7295 @ifclear GENERIC
7296 @ifset W32
7297 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7298 @end ifset
7299 @ifset W16
7300 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7301 @end ifset
7302 @end ifclear
7303 @ifset GENERIC
7304
7305 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7306 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7307 @end ifset
7308
7309 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7310 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7311 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7312 @cindex difference tables altered
7313 @cindex altered difference tables
7314 @quotation
7315 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7316 @end quotation
7317
7318 @ifset GENERIC
7319 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7320 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7321 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7322 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7323
7324 @end ifset
7325 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7326 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7327 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7328 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7329 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7330 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7331 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7332 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7333 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7334 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7335 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7336 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7337 @code{sym2}.
7338
7339 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7340 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7341 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7342 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7343 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7344 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7345 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7346
7347 @ifset INTERNALS
7348 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7349 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7350 assembly language programmers.
7351 @end ifset
7352 @end ifset
7353 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7354
7355 @ifclear no-space-dir
7356 @node Zero
7357 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7358
7359 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7360 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7361 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7362 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7363 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7364 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7365 @end ifclear
7366
7367 @ifset ELF
7368 @node 2byte
7369 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7370 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7371 @cindex two-byte integer
7372 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7373
7374 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7375 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7376 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7377 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7378 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7379 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7380 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7381 value at link time.
7382
7383 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7384 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7385 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7386
7387 This directive is only available for ELF targets,
7388
7389 @node 4byte
7390 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7391 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7392 @cindex four-byte integer
7393 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7394
7395 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7396 long values into the output.
7397
7398 @node 8byte
7399 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7400 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7401 @cindex eight-byte integer
7402 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7403
7404 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7405 byte long bignum values into the output.
7406
7407 @end ifset
7408
7409 @node Deprecated
7410 @section Deprecated Directives
7411
7412 @cindex deprecated directives
7413 @cindex obsolescent directives
7414 One day these directives won't work.
7415 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7416 @table @t
7417 @item .abort
7418 @item .line
7419 @end table
7420
7421 @ifset ELF
7422 @node Object Attributes
7423 @chapter Object Attributes
7424 @cindex object attributes
7425
7426 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7427 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7428 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7429 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7430 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7431 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7432 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7433 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7434 newer generation at run-time.
7435
7436 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7437 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7438 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7439 correctly.
7440
7441 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7442 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7443 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7444 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7445 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7446 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7447
7448 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7449 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7450
7451 @menu
7452 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7453 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7454 @end menu
7455
7456 @node GNU Object Attributes
7457 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7458
7459 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7460 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7461
7462 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7463 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7464 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7465 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7466 architecture-dependent ones.
7467
7468 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7469
7470 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7471
7472 @table @r
7473 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7474 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7475 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7476 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7477 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7478 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7479 @end table
7480
7481 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7482
7483 @table @r
7484 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7485 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7486
7487 @itemize @bullet
7488 @item
7489 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7490 @item
7491 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7492 double-precision FPU.
7493 @item
7494 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7495 @item
7496 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7497 @item
7498 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7499 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7500 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7501 @item
7502 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7503 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7504 general-purpose registers.
7505 @item
7506 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7507 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7508 @item
7509 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7510 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7511 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7512 @end itemize
7513 @end table
7514
7515 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7516
7517 @table @r
7518 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7519 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7520
7521 @itemize @bullet
7522 @item
7523 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7524 @item
7525 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7526 @item
7527 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7528 @item
7529 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7530 @end itemize
7531
7532 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7533 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7534
7535 @itemize @bullet
7536 @item
7537 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7538 @item
7539 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7540 @item
7541 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7542 @item
7543 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7544 @end itemize
7545 @end table
7546
7547 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7548
7549 @table @r
7550 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7551 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7552
7553 @itemize @bullet
7554 @item
7555 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7556 @item
7557 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7558 @item
7559 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7560 @end itemize
7561 @end table
7562
7563 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7564 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7565
7566 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7567 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7568 mailing list.
7569
7570 @itemize @bullet
7571 @item
7572 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7573 @item
7574 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7575 @item
7576 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7577 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7578 @item
7579 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7580 @item
7581 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7582 @item
7583 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7584 @end itemize
7585
7586 @end ifset
7587
7588 @ifset GENERIC
7589 @node Machine Dependencies
7590 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7591
7592 @cindex machine dependencies
7593 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7594 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7595 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7596 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7597 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7598 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7599 optimization.
7600
7601 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7602 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7603 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7604
7605 @menu
7606 @ifset AARCH64
7607 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7608 @end ifset
7609 @ifset ALPHA
7610 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7611 @end ifset
7612 @ifset ARC
7613 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7614 @end ifset
7615 @ifset ARM
7616 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7617 @end ifset
7618 @ifset AVR
7619 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7620 @end ifset
7621 @ifset Blackfin
7622 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7623 @end ifset
7624 @ifset CR16
7625 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7626 @end ifset
7627 @ifset CRIS
7628 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7629 @end ifset
7630 @ifset D10V
7631 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7632 @end ifset
7633 @ifset D30V
7634 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7635 @end ifset
7636 @ifset EPIPHANY
7637 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7638 @end ifset
7639 @ifset H8/300
7640 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7641 @end ifset
7642 @ifset HPPA
7643 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7644 @end ifset
7645 @ifset I370
7646 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7647 @end ifset
7648 @ifset I80386
7649 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7650 @end ifset
7651 @ifset I860
7652 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7653 @end ifset
7654 @ifset I960
7655 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7656 @end ifset
7657 @ifset IA64
7658 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7659 @end ifset
7660 @ifset IP2K
7661 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7662 @end ifset
7663 @ifset LM32
7664 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7665 @end ifset
7666 @ifset M32C
7667 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7668 @end ifset
7669 @ifset M32R
7670 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7671 @end ifset
7672 @ifset M680X0
7673 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7674 @end ifset
7675 @ifset M68HC11
7676 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7677 @end ifset
7678 @ifset METAG
7679 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7680 @end ifset
7681 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7682 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7683 @end ifset
7684 @ifset MIPS
7685 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7686 @end ifset
7687 @ifset MMIX
7688 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7689 @end ifset
7690 @ifset MSP430
7691 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7692 @end ifset
7693 @ifset NDS32
7694 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7695 @end ifset
7696 @ifset NIOSII
7697 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7698 @end ifset
7699 @ifset NS32K
7700 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7701 @end ifset
7702 @ifset PDP11
7703 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7704 @end ifset
7705 @ifset PJ
7706 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7707 @end ifset
7708 @ifset PPC
7709 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7710 @end ifset
7711 @ifset PRU
7712 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7713 @end ifset
7714 @ifset RISCV
7715 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7716 @end ifset
7717 @ifset RL78
7718 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7719 @end ifset
7720 @ifset RX
7721 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7722 @end ifset
7723 @ifset S390
7724 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7725 @end ifset
7726 @ifset SCORE
7727 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7728 @end ifset
7729 @ifset SH
7730 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7731 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7732 @end ifset
7733 @ifset SPARC
7734 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7735 @end ifset
7736 @ifset TIC54X
7737 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7738 @end ifset
7739 @ifset TIC6X
7740 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7741 @end ifset
7742 @ifset TILEGX
7743 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7744 @end ifset
7745 @ifset TILEPRO
7746 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7747 @end ifset
7748 @ifset V850
7749 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7750 @end ifset
7751 @ifset VAX
7752 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7753 @end ifset
7754 @ifset VISIUM
7755 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7756 @end ifset
7757 @ifset WASM32
7758 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
7759 @end ifset
7760 @ifset XGATE
7761 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
7762 @end ifset
7763 @ifset XSTORMY16
7764 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7765 @end ifset
7766 @ifset XTENSA
7767 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7768 @end ifset
7769 @ifset Z80
7770 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7771 @end ifset
7772 @ifset Z8000
7773 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7774 @end ifset
7775 @end menu
7776
7777 @lowersections
7778 @end ifset
7779
7780 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7781 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7782 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7783 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7784 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7785 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7786 @c in both conditional blocks.
7787
7788 @ifset AARCH64
7789 @include c-aarch64.texi
7790 @end ifset
7791
7792 @ifset ALPHA
7793 @include c-alpha.texi
7794 @end ifset
7795
7796 @ifset ARC
7797 @include c-arc.texi
7798 @end ifset
7799
7800 @ifset ARM
7801 @include c-arm.texi
7802 @end ifset
7803
7804 @ifset AVR
7805 @include c-avr.texi
7806 @end ifset
7807
7808 @ifset Blackfin
7809 @include c-bfin.texi
7810 @end ifset
7811
7812 @ifset CR16
7813 @include c-cr16.texi
7814 @end ifset
7815
7816 @ifset CRIS
7817 @include c-cris.texi
7818 @end ifset
7819
7820 @ifset Renesas-all
7821 @ifclear GENERIC
7822 @node Machine Dependencies
7823 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7824
7825 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7826 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7827 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7828 family.
7829
7830 @menu
7831 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7832 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7833 @end menu
7834 @lowersections
7835 @end ifclear
7836 @end ifset
7837
7838 @ifset D10V
7839 @include c-d10v.texi
7840 @end ifset
7841
7842 @ifset D30V
7843 @include c-d30v.texi
7844 @end ifset
7845
7846 @ifset EPIPHANY
7847 @include c-epiphany.texi
7848 @end ifset
7849
7850 @ifset H8/300
7851 @include c-h8300.texi
7852 @end ifset
7853
7854 @ifset HPPA
7855 @include c-hppa.texi
7856 @end ifset
7857
7858 @ifset I370
7859 @include c-i370.texi
7860 @end ifset
7861
7862 @ifset I80386
7863 @include c-i386.texi
7864 @end ifset
7865
7866 @ifset I860
7867 @include c-i860.texi
7868 @end ifset
7869
7870 @ifset I960
7871 @include c-i960.texi
7872 @end ifset
7873
7874 @ifset IA64
7875 @include c-ia64.texi
7876 @end ifset
7877
7878 @ifset IP2K
7879 @include c-ip2k.texi
7880 @end ifset
7881
7882 @ifset LM32
7883 @include c-lm32.texi
7884 @end ifset
7885
7886 @ifset M32C
7887 @include c-m32c.texi
7888 @end ifset
7889
7890 @ifset M32R
7891 @include c-m32r.texi
7892 @end ifset
7893
7894 @ifset M680X0
7895 @include c-m68k.texi
7896 @end ifset
7897
7898 @ifset M68HC11
7899 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7900 @end ifset
7901
7902 @ifset METAG
7903 @include c-metag.texi
7904 @end ifset
7905
7906 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7907 @include c-microblaze.texi
7908 @end ifset
7909
7910 @ifset MIPS
7911 @include c-mips.texi
7912 @end ifset
7913
7914 @ifset MMIX
7915 @include c-mmix.texi
7916 @end ifset
7917
7918 @ifset MSP430
7919 @include c-msp430.texi
7920 @end ifset
7921
7922 @ifset NDS32
7923 @include c-nds32.texi
7924 @end ifset
7925
7926 @ifset NIOSII
7927 @include c-nios2.texi
7928 @end ifset
7929
7930 @ifset NS32K
7931 @include c-ns32k.texi
7932 @end ifset
7933
7934 @ifset PDP11
7935 @include c-pdp11.texi
7936 @end ifset
7937
7938 @ifset PJ
7939 @include c-pj.texi
7940 @end ifset
7941
7942 @ifset PPC
7943 @include c-ppc.texi
7944 @end ifset
7945
7946 @ifset PRU
7947 @include c-pru.texi
7948 @end ifset
7949
7950 @ifset RISCV
7951 @include c-riscv.texi
7952 @end ifset
7953
7954 @ifset RL78
7955 @include c-rl78.texi
7956 @end ifset
7957
7958 @ifset RX
7959 @include c-rx.texi
7960 @end ifset
7961
7962 @ifset S390
7963 @include c-s390.texi
7964 @end ifset
7965
7966 @ifset SCORE
7967 @include c-score.texi
7968 @end ifset
7969
7970 @ifset SH
7971 @include c-sh.texi
7972 @include c-sh64.texi
7973 @end ifset
7974
7975 @ifset SPARC
7976 @include c-sparc.texi
7977 @end ifset
7978
7979 @ifset TIC54X
7980 @include c-tic54x.texi
7981 @end ifset
7982
7983 @ifset TIC6X
7984 @include c-tic6x.texi
7985 @end ifset
7986
7987 @ifset TILEGX
7988 @include c-tilegx.texi
7989 @end ifset
7990
7991 @ifset TILEPRO
7992 @include c-tilepro.texi
7993 @end ifset
7994
7995 @ifset V850
7996 @include c-v850.texi
7997 @end ifset
7998
7999 @ifset VAX
8000 @include c-vax.texi
8001 @end ifset
8002
8003 @ifset VISIUM
8004 @include c-visium.texi
8005 @end ifset
8006
8007 @ifset WASM32
8008 @include c-wasm32.texi
8009 @end ifset
8010
8011 @ifset XGATE
8012 @include c-xgate.texi
8013 @end ifset
8014
8015 @ifset XSTORMY16
8016 @include c-xstormy16.texi
8017 @end ifset
8018
8019 @ifset XTENSA
8020 @include c-xtensa.texi
8021 @end ifset
8022
8023 @ifset Z80
8024 @include c-z80.texi
8025 @end ifset
8026
8027 @ifset Z8000
8028 @include c-z8k.texi
8029 @end ifset
8030
8031 @ifset GENERIC
8032 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
8033 @raisesections
8034 @end ifset
8035
8036 @node Reporting Bugs
8037 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8038 @cindex bugs in assembler
8039 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
8040
8041 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
8042
8043 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
8044 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
8045 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
8046 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
8047
8048 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8049 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8050
8051 @menu
8052 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8053 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8054 @end menu
8055
8056 @node Bug Criteria
8057 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8058 @cindex bug criteria
8059
8060 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8061
8062 @itemize @bullet
8063 @cindex fatal signal
8064 @cindex assembler crash
8065 @cindex crash of assembler
8066 @item
8067 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8068 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
8069
8070 @cindex error on valid input
8071 @item
8072 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8073
8074 @cindex invalid input
8075 @item
8076 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8077 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
8078 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
8079
8080 @item
8081 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
8082 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
8083 @end itemize
8084
8085 @node Bug Reporting
8086 @section How to Report Bugs
8087 @cindex bug reports
8088 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
8089
8090 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
8091 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
8092 contact that organization first.
8093
8094 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8095 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8096 distribution.
8097
8098 @ifset BUGURL
8099 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8100 to @value{BUGURL}.
8101 @end ifset
8102
8103 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8104 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8105 fact or leave it out, state it!
8106
8107 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8108 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8109 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8110 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8111 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8112 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8113 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8114 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8115 and the most helpful.
8116
8117 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8118 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8119 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8120
8121 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8122 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8123 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8124 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8125
8126 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8127
8128 @itemize @bullet
8129 @item
8130 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8131 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8132
8133 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8134 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8135
8136 @item
8137 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8138
8139 @item
8140 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8141 version number.
8142
8143 @item
8144 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8145 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8146
8147 @item
8148 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8149 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8150 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8151
8152 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8153 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8154
8155 @item
8156 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8157 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8158 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8159 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8160 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8161 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8162 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8163
8164 @item
8165 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8166 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8167
8168 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8169 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8170 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8171 make a mistake.
8172
8173 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8174 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8175 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8176 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8177 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8178 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8179 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8180 observations.
8181
8182 @item
8183 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8184 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8185 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8186 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8187 by line number.
8188
8189 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8190 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8191 @end itemize
8192
8193 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8194
8195 @itemize @bullet
8196 @item
8197 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8198
8199 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8200 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8201 changes will not affect it.
8202
8203 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8204 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8205 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8206 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8207
8208 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8209 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8210 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8211 less time, and so on.
8212
8213 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8214 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8215
8216 @item
8217 A patch for the bug.
8218
8219 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8220 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8221 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8222 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8223
8224 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8225 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8226 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8227 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8228
8229 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8230 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8231 help us to understand.
8232
8233 @item
8234 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8235
8236 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8237 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8238 @end itemize
8239
8240 @node Acknowledgements
8241 @chapter Acknowledgements
8242
8243 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8244 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8245 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8246 @c (October 2012),
8247 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8248
8249 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8250 more details?}
8251
8252 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8253 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8254 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8255
8256 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8257 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8258 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8259 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8260 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8261 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8262 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8263 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8264 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8265 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8266
8267 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8268 in format-specific I/O modules.
8269
8270 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8271 has done much work with it since.
8272
8273 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8274
8275 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8276
8277 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8278 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8279
8280 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8281 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8282 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8283 support a.out format.
8284
8285 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8286 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8287 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8288 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8289 targets.
8290
8291 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8292 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8293 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8294 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8295 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8296 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8297 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8298
8299 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8300 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8301 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8302 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8303
8304 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8305
8306 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8307
8308 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8309 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8310 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8311 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8312
8313 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8314 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8315 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8316 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8317 and some initial 64-bit support).
8318
8319 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8320
8321 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8322 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8323
8324 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8325 flavors.
8326
8327 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8328 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8329
8330 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8331 configuration enhancements.
8332
8333 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8334
8335 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8336 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8337 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8338 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8339
8340 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8341 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8342 @include fdl.texi
8343
8344 @node AS Index
8345 @unnumbered AS Index
8346
8347 @printindex cp
8348
8349 @bye
8350 @c Local Variables:
8351 @c fill-column: 79
8352 @c End:
This page took 0.226716 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.